Loughborough University
Leicestershire, UK
LE11 3TU
+44 (0)1509 222222
Loughborough University

Programme Specifications

Programme Specification

IS MSc Information and Knowledge Management

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Accredited by the Chartered Institute of Library and Information Professionals

Final award MSc/PGDip/PGCert
Programme title Information and Knowledge Management
Programme code ISPT37/38
Length of programme The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is one calendar year full-time. The minimum period of study for the award of PGDip is nine months full-time. The minimum period of study for the award of PGCert is one semester, full-time.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

  • Develop a critical understanding of the professional, managerial, cognitive, ethical, legal and technical dimensions of information management and knowledge management;
  • Develop and apply advanced abilities in collecting, assimilating and using information and knowledge resources in support of specific organisational objectives;
  • Acquire critical reading and research skills appropriate to researching issues of information and knowledge management within the workplace;
  • Complete a self-directed and managed piece of research exploring the dimensions of information and knowledge management relevant to current business practice;
  • Analyse the changing theoretical context in which research on information and knowledge management has developed;
  • Enhance employment skills, with particular reference to employment in positions where awareness of information and knowledge management is essential.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • QAA Subject Benchmark Statement for Librarianship and Information Management (2007)

http://www.qaa.ac.uk/academicinfrastructure/benchmark/statements/librarianship07.pdf

https://internal.lboro.ac.uk/sci/ls/dept/L&T%20documents/Learning%20and%20Teaching%20Strategy%20revised%20Feb02.doc

  • QAA: Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

  • the current theories, principles and practice of information and knowledge management
  • the history, concepts and antecedents of knowledge management and its current role in organisations
  • the development and implementation of information and knowledge management policies and strategies
  • the importance of intellectual capital, combined with its ethical management and exploitation within organisations
  • the importance of relevant technologies, combined with human resource management strategies, change management and organisational culture as an integral part of successful information and knowledge management. 

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
  • Evaluate the range of methods available in order to critically analyse tangible and intangible knowledge assets in an organisation
  • Apply technical and managerial concepts, theories and evidence to demonstrate a conceptual understanding of alternative information and knowledge management practices in an organisation
  • Demonstrate initiative and originality by applying appropriate theory, practices and tools for the specification, design and implementation of information and knowledge management systems, including the use of Intranets and collaborative technological tools
  • Demonstrate a level of conceptual understanding in order to critically evaluate how knowledge bases are constructed, organised and maintained, utilising knowledge from the forefront of the discipline
  • Apply expert information searching and retrieval skills, as well as those skills essential to effective information and knowledge organisation and retrieval, including the use of metadata and taxonomies
  • Act autonomously in planning and successfully completing an original piece of research on information and knowledge management at a high professional and academic level, dovetailing both theoretical rigour and solid analysis.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
  • Critically read, evaluate and summarise current academic debates pertaining to information and knowledge management
  • Successfully model the design of an effective information portal using appropriate practical techniques and tools
  • Critically evaluate and select a range of information and knowledge management systems and solutions using a structured feature analysis process
  • Successfully analyse and interpret business intelligence data to solve a range of information and knowledge management problems via quantitative techniques
  • Manage the research process, conducting research in a way that is consistent with both professional practice and the principles of research ethics. 
c. Key transferable skills:
  • Communication skills: writing, dissemination and media skills
  • Oral presentation skills for seminars, workshops, business meetings and conferences
  • Research management and time management skills
  • Bibliographic and computing skills
  • Decision-making ability in complex and unpredictable situations
  • Management and leadership skills
  • Independent learning ability required for continuing professional development

4. Programme structure

To be eligible for consideration for these awards, students must have studied the following modules:

Semester One           

All compulsory modules

           

Title

Credit Value

ISP509

Business Intelligence and Analysis

15

ISP487

Principles of Information and Knowledge Management

15

ISP503

Information Architecture

15

ISP535

Research Management

15

Semester Two           

All compulsory modules 

           

Title

Credit Value

ISP501

Information Retrieval for Knowledge Management

15

COP400

Web Design and Web Analytics

15

COP453

Information Systems and Modelling 

15

ISP310

Leadership and Change Management

15

ISP600/601

Dissertation (full or part-time)

60

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XXI  for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in any module other than ISP600 or ISP601 to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

IS MA/MSc Information and Library Management

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MA/MSc/PGDip/PGCert
Programme title Information and Library Management
Programme code ISPT39/40
Length of programme Study may be full-time or part-time. The minimum period of study for the award of MA or MSc is one calendar year full-time. The minimum period of study for the award of PGDip is nine months full-time. The minimum period of study for the award of PGCert is one semester, full-time.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

  • An awareness of the role and significance of an information based society, including the economics and dynamics of information in society, between nations, governments, organisations, communities and individuals
  • A systematic understanding of the professional, managerial and technical dimensions of librarianship and other information work
  • A critical awareness of current problems and new insights at the forefront of both the discipline and professional practice
  • the core skills required to obtain a first professional post in the sector, building on pre-programme experience
  • comprehensive knowledge of the role and practice of research in the information field
  • the learning and leadership skills needed for further professional development.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

QAA Subject benchmark statement for Librarianship and Information Management 2007)
http://www.qaa.ac.uk/academicinfrastructure/benchmark/statements/librarianship07.pdf


The Response of The Library Association to the Institute for Learning and Teaching The National Framework for Higher Education Teaching (http://www.la-hq.org.uk/directory/prof_issues/iltnf.html)


Chartered Institute of Library and Information Professionals (CILIP) Body of Professional Knowledge
http://www.cilip.org.uk/jobs-careers/qualifications/accreditation/bpk/Pages/default.aspx


Loughborough University A Strategy for Learning and Teaching in the New Millennium
(http://www.lboro.ac.uk/admin/ar/policy/learning_and_teaching


Department of Information Science Learning and Teaching Strategy
https://internal.lboro.ac.uk/sci/ls/dept/L&T%20documents/Learning%20and%20Teaching%20Strategy%20revised%20Feb02.doc


Department of Information Science Self Assessment Document (October
2000)


Framework for Higher Education Qualifications in England, Wales and Northern Ireland

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

  • the principles and practice of information and library management
  • the relationship between managing information, organising and disseminating information
  • the associated legal and professional issues
  • information needs and user behaviour

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
  • appreciate and understand the principles of applied research in information management
  • utilise skills in strategic thinking, scenario planning and systems thinking in projects relating to information and library management
  • solve problems both in relation to information management systems and a range of professional issues
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
  • Skills in use of metadata
  • Skills in designing & analysing web-based systems
  • Skills in promotion of information literacy and enabling people’s capacity in information literacy
  • Skills in information management, retrieval and dissemination
c. Key transferable skills:
  • information searching and use for specific purposes
  • effective oral communication
  • effective written communication
  • team working
  • leadership, negotiation and advocacy skills.

4. Programme structure

Semester One

Compulsory Modules

           

Title

Credit Value

ISP431

Information Law, Policy and Society

15

ISP432

Information Needs and Information Literacy

15

ISP433

Information Organisation and Retrieval  

15

ISP535

Research Management

15

Optional Modules - Choose One

           

Title

Credit Value

ISP413

Information and Knowledge Management in the NHS

10

ISP414

Information Services and Libraries

10

EAP801

The Child and the Book

10


Semester Two

Compulsory Modules

           

Title

Credit Value

ISP430

Collection Management and Preservation

10

COP400

Web Design and Web Analytics

15

ISP434

Management and Marketing of Information Services

15

ISP600/601

Dissertation (full or part-time)  

60

Optional Modules - Choose One

           

Title

Credit Value

ISP428

Digital Curation

10

ISP420

Consumer Health Information

10

ISP425

Culture and Change Management

10

ISP427

Managing Projects: Managing Knowledge

10

 

 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

5.2 For Masters students, the award of MA or MSc is decided in consultation with individual students; factors which determine the award are the dissertation topic, the methods of investigation and the balance of optional modules chosen.  

5.3 Part-time students registered before 2007 may take modules as necessary to obtain 120 credits from taught modules.

5.4 Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XXI  for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in any module other than ISP600 or ISP601 to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

IS MSc Information Management and Business Technology

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/PGDip/PGCert
Programme title Information Management and Business Technology
Programme code BSPT07/08
Length of programme This programme is available by full-time or part-time study. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is one calendar year full-time; the minimum period of study for the award of PGDip is nine months full-time; the minimum period of study for the award of PGCert is one semester full-time. Part-time study requires completion within the following times: MSc – 8 years, PGDip – 5 years, PGCert – 3 years.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

  • Acquire critical technological and analytical skills appropriate to effective workplace performance in the implementation and leadership of information management and business technology initiatives;
  • Develop a critical understanding of the role and significance of both being an information technology specialist and a business generalist;
  • Complete a self-directed and managed piece of research exploring the relationship of information management and business technologies;
  • Develop a critical understanding of the ongoing impacts of both information management and business technology perspectives on the workplace;
  • Enhance employment skills, with particular reference to employment in positions where knowledge of and skills in information management and business technology are essential. 

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • QAA Subject Benchmark Statement for:

          Librarianship, information, knowledge, records and archives management (2014)

http://www.qaa.ac.uk/en/Publications/Documents/SBS-consultation-librarianship.pdf

(http://www.lboro.ac.uk/admin/ar/policy/learning_and_teaching/)

  • Loughborough University School of Business and Economics, Learning and Teaching Strategy
  • Framework for Higher Education Qualifications in England, Wales and Northern Ireland
  • Annual and Periodic Programme Review
  • External Examiners' reports
  • Staff-Student committees 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

  • the principles and practice of information and business technology management
  • the relationship between traditionally technology-independent areas of an organisation and non-technical business areas

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
  • Appreciate the range of methods used to manage the relationship between traditionally technology-independent areas of an organisation and non-technical business areas
  • Understand, by applying appropriate theory, practices and tools for the specification, design and implementation of information systems
  • Understand, by applying technical and managerial concepts, theories and evidence to analyse business information and knowledge networks within organisations
  • Understand information and knowledge management policies and strategies that enhance effectiveness in organisations
  • Successfully complete an original piece of research on information management and business technology dovetailing both theoretical rigour and solid analysis 
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
  • Critically evaluate and select management tools and techniques for a given project
  • Successfully model the requirements of information systems using appropriate modelling tools
  • Manage and assess user requirements for collaborative technologies using a range of qualitative methods
  • Successfully apply a systems approach to problem structuring and problem solving within a business enterprise framework
  • Manage the process of identifying and documenting risks associated with the development process and with target systems
c. Key transferable skills:
  • Communication skills: writing, dissemination and media skills
  • Oral presentation skills for seminars, workshops and conferences
  • Research management and time management skills
  • Bibliographic and computing skills
  • Decision-making ability in complex and unpredictable situations
  • Independent learning ability required for continuing professional development.

4. Programme structure

To be eligible for consideration for these awards, students must have studied the following modules:

Semester One    

All compulsory modules

ISP485

Supporting Collaborative Work through Technology

15

ISP488

Management of IT Systems

15

ISP490

Business Relationships Management

15

ISP491

Business Technologies and Platforms

15

Semester Two     

All compulsory modules  

ISP483

Project Management and Leadership

15

ISP484

Information and Social Network Analysis

15

ISP486

Information Architecture

15

ISP489

Managing Knowledge in Organisations

15

ISP700/701

Dissertation (full or part-time)

60

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XXI  for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in any module other than ISP700 or ISP701 to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Finance/ MSc Finance and Investment/ MSc Corporate Finance

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc
Programme title Finance/ Finance and Investment/ Corporate Finance
Programme code BSPT28 MSc Corporate Finance, BSPT29 MSc Finance, BSPT27 MSc Finance and Investment
Length of programme
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/programmes/departments/business-economics/finance/

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/programmes/departments/business-economics/finance-investment/

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/programmes/departments/business-economics/corporate-finance/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

  • To provide a programme informed by current developments in finance, which is practically relevant.
  • To develop a comprehensive understanding of finance theory and its application.
  • To enhance students’ lifelong learning skills and personal development so as to be able to work effectively and to contribute to business and society

For MSc Finance

  • To provide graduates with appropriate tools of analysis to critically evaluate complex financial issues both systematically and creatively, to improve financial practice.

For MSc Finance and Investment

  • To provide graduates with appropriate tools of analysis to critically evaluate complex investment issues both systematically and creatively, to improve the practice of risk measurement and investment management.

For MSc Corporate Finance

  • To provide graduates with appropriate tools of analysis to critically evaluate complex corporate financial issues both systematically and creatively, to improve corporate treasury management practice.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • QAA Framework for Higher Education Qualifications, Master’s Degrees

  • QAA Finance Subject Benchmark Statement

  • Loughborough University “Building Excellence” Strategy Document

  • School of Business and Economics Strategic Plan

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

For MSc Finance

K1  appraise the core theories of finance and assess the empirical evidence on these

K2  critically discuss the financing arrangements and governance structures of business entities

K3  evaluate the factors influencing investment behaviour

K4  demonstrate a critical awareness of how financial markets operate in different settings

K5  debate the role of finance in society and the wider economy

For MSc Finance and Investment

K1-5

K6  debate and critically assess complex investment issues including risk measurement and investment management.

For MSc Corporate Finance

K1-5

K7 debate and critically assess complex corporate finance issues in corporate treasury management and executive financial decision making.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

C1  analyse and solve theoretical and practical problems in finance

C2  synthesise important issues and themes from the professional and academic literature in finance

For MSc Finance

C3  critically evaluate arguments and evidence related to finance

For MSc Finance and Investment

C4  critically evaluate arguments and evidence related to investment practice.

For MSc Corporate Finance

C5 critically evaluate arguments and evidence related to the practice of treasury management.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

P1  prepare reports suitable for a professional audience

P2  collect and analyse relevant financial data using appropriate techniques

P3  use appropriate analytical and professional tools in complex financial scenarios

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

 T1  critically analyse and evaluate complex topics

T2  formulate key arguments from an extensive range of evidence

T3  demonstrate advanced skills in numeracy ( Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques)

T4  apply logical thinking and problem solving in unstructured situations

T5  use advanced information technology (e.g. handling of large data sets, multifaceted information retrieval and spread-sheet methods)

T6  demonstrate effective personal organisation including time management, independent study, self-direction, decision-making and written and oral communication

T7  use effective team-working skills including leadership, team-building and project management

4. Programme structure

4.1   MSc Finance

Module Structure

Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 120)

Code         

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

BSP420

Methods for Financial Data Analysis

15

1

BSP421

Principles of Finance

15

1

BSP422

Financial Markets and Institutions

15

1

BSP423

Financial Reporting and Company Performance

15

1

BSP424

Corporate Finance

15

2

BSP425

Portfolio Management

15

2

BSP429

Business Communication for Finance

15

3

BSP434

Corporate Governance and Responsibility

15

3

 

Option Modules.

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose Four optional Modules (total modular weight 60). Two optional Modules (total modular weight 30) will be taken in Semester 2 and chosen from List A and List B below.  At least one option must be chosen from List A. Two optional Modules (total modular weight 30) will be taken in Semester 3 and chosen from List C.

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

List A

BSP426

International Financial Management

15

2

BSP427

Financial Statements and Business Valuation

15

2

BSP428

Derivatives and Risk Management

15

2

List B

BSP430

Global Financial Markets and the Financial Crisis

15

2

BSP024

Business Economics

15

2

BSP041

Small Business and Entrepreneurship

15

2

List C

BSP431

Corporate Financial Analysis

15

3

BSP432

Global Investment Analysis

15

3

BSP433

Advanced Corporate Finance

15

3

BSP435

Financial Trading

15

3

 

4.2    MSc Finance and Investment

 

Module Structure

Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 165)

Code         

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

BSP420

Methods for Financial Data Analysis

15

1

BSP421

Principles of Finance

15

1

BSP422

Financial Markets and Institutions

15

1

BSP423

Financial Reporting and Company Performance

15

1

BSP425

Portfolio Management

15

2

BSP427

Financial Statements and Business Valuation

15

2

BSP428

Derivatives and Risk Management

15

2

BSP429

Business Communication for Finance

15

3

BSP432

Global Investment Analysis

15

3

BSP434

Corporate Governance and Responsibility

15

3

BSP435

Financial Trading

15

3

Semester 2 Option Modules.

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose One optional Modules, (total modular weight 15) to be chosen from the list below. 

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

BSP424

Corporate Finance

15

BSP426

International Financial Management

15

BSP430

Global Financial Markets and the Financial Crisis

15

BSP024

Business Economics

15

ECP158

Applied Banking and Financial Modelling

15

 

 

4.3 MSc Corporate Finance

 Module Structure

 Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 165)

Code         

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

BSP420

Methods for Financial Data Analysis

15

1

BSP421

Principles of Finance

15

1

BSP422

Financial Markets and Institutions

15

1

BSP423

Financial Reporting and Company Performance

15

1

BSP424

Corporate Finance

15

2

BSP426

International Financial Management

15

2

BSP427

Financial Statements and Business Valuation

15

2

BSP429

Business Communication for Finance

15

3

BSP431

Corporate Financial Analysis

15

3

BSP433

Advanced Corporate Finance

15

3

BSP434

Corporate Governance and Responsibility

15

3

Semester 2 Option Modules.

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose One optional Modules, (total modular weight 15) to be chosen from the list below. 

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

BSP425

Portfolio Management

15

BSP430

Global Financial Markets and the Financial Crisis

15

BSP024

Business Economics

15

BSP041

Small Business and Entrepreneurship

15

 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

 

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.   

5.2 Candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s Special Assessment Period. 

5.3 All examinations must be taken at Loughborough University unless special permission is obtained in advance from the Programme Director

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Work Psychology

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc
Programme title Work Psychology
Programme code BSPT39 (f/t) BSPT36 (p/t)
Length of programme
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/programmes/departments/business-economics/work-psychology/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

This MSc programme has a core philosophy of developing students’ knowledge base of theories, principles and practices within work psychology domains. Teaching is designed to develop students’ ability to synthesise and apply this knowledge to complex, multifaceted or ill-defined problems and to develop their ability to communicate with multiple stakeholder groups. Teaching is informed by the forefront of research, theory and practice in work psychology (and where appropriate integrated with other related disciplines).  Learning outcomes will underpin subsequent training, career routes / choices and work performance. The programme offers academically rigorous knowledge and skills development that prepares students for Doctoral pathways/research, for the British Psychological Society Stage 2 Qualification in Occupational Psychology (and subsequent registration with the Health and Care Professions Council), and for entry into both specialist work roles and management posts.  The programme balances relevant academic theory and research with the advanced application of research methods and applied practices/professional issues in work psychology domains. 

The MSc programme in Work Psychology aims: 

  • To develop an in-depth specialist understanding of theory, research and practice in work psychology
  • To encourage critical and reflective analysis of theory, research and practice in work psychology through the consideration of a wide range of work-related issues in diverse work contexts and cultures
  • To develop in students the ability to synthesise theory and research and to apply it into practice as practitioners in order to prepare students to offer valuable expertise when dealing with a variety of work-related issues
  • To foster a high-level understanding of the scientific, ethical and practical issues associated with the development and application of theory in work psychology through the consideration of multiple stakeholder perspectives
  • To prepare students who are intending to pursue a professional qualification in occupational psychology (potentially leading to full membership and Chartered Status with the BPS Division of Occupational Psychology) and/or a PhD, and those wishing to apply their learning in work organisations without following this qualification pathway.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • QAA descriptors for Higher Education Qualification at Level 7 (2008)

  • British Psychological Society Standards for Masters Programmes in Occupational Psychology (2013; and revised draft, 2014)

  • Loughborough University and School of Business and Economics Strategy Documents

  • Loughborough University Learning and Teaching Strategy

  • Masters programmes within the School of Business and Economics

  • Health and Care Professions Council Standards of Proficiency – Practitioner Psychologists (2010)

  • European Master on Work and Organizational Psychology WOP-P (content and learning outcomes)

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

K1        key theories and contemporary practices relating to the assessment of individuals’ knowledge, skills, abilities, goals and other constructs in various work-related contexts and cultures

K2        important and influential research-based theories of career and personal development including the application of a range of psychological theories to individual- and group-level learning, development and knowledge management

K3        the essential features of leadership theories including the implications of these for the identification and development of leaders and the management of a range of work issues

K4        approaches to measuring and managing work performance, employee motivation, and employee participation

K5        the measurement and determinants of work-related attitudes, health and well-being, linked to an understanding of the processes and outcomes of various organisational change interventions

K6        the psychological influences on employees’ responses to different types of work, different work environments, work cultures and different management practices

K7        the development, implementation and evaluation of theory-based problem-solving processes in work-related contexts based on an understanding of key scientist practitioner skills and advanced quantitative and qualitative research methods

K8        professional codes of conduct including BPS Code of Conduct, HCPC Standards of Conduct, Performance and Ethics, and other relevant ethical principles and guidelines

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

C1       Critically evaluate knowledge, theory and practice from work psychology and relevant related disciplines

C2       Apply their knowledge and understanding to critically evaluate, synthesise and reflect upon professional and ethical issues raised in both research and practice in work psychology

C3       Apply key theoretical principles to a range of work-related problems and issues in a variety of different work settings

C4       Build strategies for the assessment of work-related issues through psychological enquiry and to critically evaluate the suitability of different strategies for the implementation and evaluation of interventions

C5       Use their understanding of psychological theories and concepts to communicate effectively about all aspects of their work to a range of different stakeholder groups

C6       Integrate, evaluate and apply their knowledge of the topics diversity, fairness, gender and culture across the whole of the curriculum

C7       Reflect upon the development of knowledge and skills relevant to their progression as an occupational psychologist

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

P1        Identify and apply a variety of assessment methods to gather evidence relating to work-related issues and problems across a range of different domains within work psychology and across all parts of the problem-solving cycle

P2        Make appropriate evidence-based and ethical choices about the suitability of a range of practical theory-based techniques used in work psychology

P3        Use, when appropriate, a range of practical skills commonly deployed by work psychologists (e.g. interviewing techniques, critical incidents, repertory grid, questionnaire design etc.)

P4        Critically and reflectively analyse various sources of evidence and identify both new and established implications for practice

P5        Identify areas of practice and work-related issues that could benefit from research; design, conduct and evaluate an appropriate investigation

P6        Integrate different activities across the problem-solving cycle (e.g. problem assessment, intervention design and evaluation of solutions) in an appropriate and ethical way

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

T1        Communicate effectively orally, electronically and in writing to a wide range of different stakeholder groups and in a number of different formats

T2        Apply constructive and structured approaches to complex problem-solving and intervention evaluation even in the face of uncertainties and incomplete information

T3        Manage personal learning efficiently and effectively through an appreciation of the skills and capabilities needed to apply psychology effectively in work settings

T4        Use IT effectively as a learning and communication tool

T5        Develop and utilise the advanced research skills needed to work with complex data and research / practical agendas

T6        Work effectively and confidently both as an individual and as part of a small team within constrained time-frames

T7        Work independently in a way that stimulates continued professional development by using the available support strategically and effectively

4. Programme structure

The course consists of eight 15-credit modules and one 60-credit research project.  

Code

Title

Modular Weight

Exam Weight

BSP404

Gathering and Using Evidence in Work Psychology (S1, S2)

15

0

BSP400

Leadership and Performance Management (S1)

15

0

BSP401

Employee Engagement, Motivation and Voice (S1)

15

0

BSP402

Well-being and Work (S1)

15

0

BSP403

Work Design, Organisational Change and Development (S1)

15

0

BSP405

Psychological Assessment in Organisations (S2)

15

0

BSP406

Career Development (S2)

15

0

BSP407

Learning, Development and Knowledge Management (S2)

15

0

BSP408

Empirical Research Project in Work Psychology

60

0

 Students who wish to study part-time will be guided by their personal tutor as to the sequencing and timing of modules, taking into account module pre-requisites and the students’ existing expertise and availability for study. In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI. Students may not submit for assessment their Empirical Research Project in Work Psychology until they have completed all other taught modules on the programme.  The module Gathering and Using Evidence in Work Psychology (BSP404) is a pre-requisite for all modules. For those studying on a part-time basis, at least on of Modules BSP400, BSP401, BSP402 or BSP403 must be studied before BSP405, BSP406 or BSP407.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Business Psychology

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc
Programme title Business Psychology
Programme code BSPT38 (f/t) BSPT35 (p/t)
Length of programme
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/programmes/departments/business-economics/business-psychology/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

This MSc programme has a core philosophy of developing students’ knowledge base of theories, principles and practices within business psychology domains. Teaching is designed to develop students’ ability to synthesise and apply this knowledge to complex, multifaceted or ill-defined problems and to develop their ability to communicate with multiple stakeholder groups. Teaching is informed by the forefront of research, theory and practice in work psychology (and where appropriate integrated with other related disciplines).  Learning outcomes will underpin subsequent training, career routes / choices and work performance. The programme offer academically rigorous knowledge and skills development that prepares students for Doctoral pathways/research, and for entry into both specialist work roles and management posts. Graduates of the programme who complete all core modules and the Empirical Research Project in Work Psychology may progress to training for the British Psychological Society Stage 2 Qualification in Occupational Psychology and subsequent registration with the Health and Care Professions Council. However, to follow this pathway a BPS-accredited undergraduate-level conversion course in Psychology will need to be completed either before or after the MSc. 

The MSc programme in Business Psychology aims: 

  • To develop an in-depth specialist understanding of theory, research and practice in business psychology
  • To encourage critical and reflective analysis of theory, research and practice in business psychology through the consideration of a wide range of work-related issues in diverse work contexts and cultures
  • To develop in students the ability to synthesise theory and research and to apply it into practice as practitioners in order to prepare students to offer valuable expertise when dealing with a variety of work-related issues
  • To foster a high-level understanding of the scientific, ethical and practical issues associated with the development and application of theory in business psychology through the consideration of multiple stakeholder perspectives
  • To prepare students who may wish to pursue a professional qualification in occupational psychology (potentially leading to full membership and Chartered Status with the BPS Division of Occupational Psychology) and/or a PhD, and those wishing to apply their learning in work organisations without following these qualification pathways.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • QAA descriptors for Higher Education Qualification at Level 7 (2008)

  • British Psychological Society Standards for Masters Programmes in Occupational Psychology (2013; and revised draft, 2014)

  • Loughborough University and School of Business and Economics Strategy Documents

  • Loughborough University Learning and Teaching Strategy

  • Masters programmes within the School of Business and Economics

  • Health and Care Professions Council Standards of Proficiency – Practitioner Psychologists (2010)

  • European Master on Work and Organizational Psychology WOP-P (content and learning outcomes)

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas: 

K1        key theories and contemporary practices relating to the assessment of individuals’ knowledge, skills, abilities, goals and other constructs in various work-related contexts and cultures 

K2        important and influential research-based theories of career and personal development including the application of a range of psychological theories to individual- and group-level learning, development and knowledge management 

K3        the essential features of leadership theories including the implications of these for the identification and development of leaders and the management of a range of work issues 

K4        approaches to measuring and managing work performance, employee motivation, and employee participation  

K5        the measurement and determinants of work-related attitudes, health and well-being, linked to an understanding of the processes and outcomes of various organisational change interventions  

K6        the psychological influences on employees’ responses to different types of work, different work environments, work cultures and different management practices  

K7        the development, implementation and evaluation of theory-based problem-solving processes in work-related contexts based on an understanding of key scientist practitioner skills and advanced quantitative and qualitative research methods 

K8        professional codes of conduct including BPS Code of Conduct, HCPC Standards of Conduct, Performance and Ethics, and other relevant ethical principles and guidelines

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

C1       Critically evaluate knowledge, theory and practice from work psychology and relevant related disciplines

C2       Apply their knowledge and understanding to critically evaluate, synthesise and reflect upon professional and ethical issues raised in both research and practice in work psychology

C3       Apply key theoretical principles to a range of work-related problems and issues in a variety of different work settings

C4       Build strategies for the assessment of work-related issues through psychological enquiry and to critically evaluate the suitability of different strategies for the implementation and evaluation of interventions

C5       Use their understanding of psychological theories and concepts to communicate effectively about all aspects of their work to a range of different stakeholder groups

C6       Integrate, evaluate and apply their knowledge of the topics diversity, fairness, gender and culture across the whole of the curriculum

C7       Reflect upon the development of knowledge and skills relevant to their progression as an occupational psychologist

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

P1        Identify and apply a variety of assessment methods to gather evidence relating to work-related issues and problems across a range of different domains within work psychology and across all parts of the problem-solving cycle

P2        Make appropriate evidence-based and ethical choices about the suitability of a range of practical theory-based techniques used in work psychology

P3        Use, when appropriate, a range of practical skills commonly deployed by work psychologists (e.g. interviewing techniques, critical incidents, repertory grid, questionnaire design etc.)

P4        Critically and reflectively analyse various sources of evidence and identify both new and established implications for practice

P5        Identify areas of practice and work-related issues that could benefit from research; design, conduct and evaluate an appropriate investigation

P6        Integrate different activities across the problem-solving cycle (e.g. problem assessment, intervention design and evaluation of solutions) in an appropriate and ethical way

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

T1        Communicate effectively orally, electronically and in writing to a wide range of different stakeholder groups and in a number of different formats 

T2        Apply constructive and structured approaches to complex problem-solving and intervention evaluation even in the face of uncertainties and incomplete information 

T3        Manage personal learning efficiently and effectively through an appreciation of the skills and capabilities needed to apply psychology effectively in work settings 

T4        Use IT effectively as a learning and communication tool 

T5        Develop and utilise the advanced research skills needed to work with complex data and research / practical agendas 

T6        Work effectively and confidently both as an individual and as part of a small team within constrained time-frames

T7        Work independently in a way that stimulates continued professional development by using the available support strategically and effectively

4. Programme structure

The course consists of eight 15-credit modules and one 60-credit research project. Students may elect to complete either the Empirical Research Project in Work Psychology (BSP408) OR the Dissertation in Business Psychology (BSP409). Only those completing BSP408 (and all other core modules) can be recorded as having a BPS-accredited MSc.  

Code

Title

Modular Weight

Exam Weight

BSP404

Gathering and Using Evidence in Work Psychology (S1, S2)

15

0

BSP400

Leadership and Performance Management (S1)

15

0

BSP401

Employee Engagement, Motivation and Voice (S1)

15

0

BSP402

Well-being and Work (S1)

15

0

BSP403

Work Design, Organisational Change and Development (S1)

15

0

BSP405

Psychological Assessment in Organisations (S2)

15

0

BSP406

Career Development (S2)

15

0

BSP407

Learning, Development and Knowledge Management (S2)

15

0

BSP408

Empirical Research Project in Work Psychology (S3: Option)

60

0

BSP409

Dissertation in Business Psychology (S3: Option)

60

0

 In exceptional circumstances and with the agreement of the course director, students may select up to two 15-credit modules (one per Semester) from the SBE existing portfolio of taught Masters modules and study these instead of two of the 15-credit modules (one per Semester) from the programme. This will only be permitted if: the substitution allows adequate assessment of learning outcomes across the programme, and the modules timetables do not clash, and the student has the specified pre-requisites. Students will be notified that substituting modules in this way will mean that they will no longer be studying sufficient modules to fulfil the requirements of a BPS Stage 1 Qualification in Occupational Psychology.  

Students who wish to study part-time will be guided by their personal tutor as to the sequencing and timing of modules, taking into account module pre-requisites and the students’ existing expertise and availability for study. In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

 

In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI. Students may not submit for assessment their Empirical Research Project in Work Psychology or Dissertation in Business Psychology until they have completed all other taught modules on the programme.  The module Gathering and Using Evidence in Work Psychology (BSP404) is a pre-requisite for all modules. For those studying on a part-time basis, at least on of Modules BSP400, BSP401, BSP402 or BSP403 must be studied before BSP405, BSP406 or BSP407.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Business Analytics Consulting

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip
Programme title Business Analytics Consulting
Programme code BSPT37
Length of programme The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twelve calendar months (i.e. completed programme taught element plus project). For the award of PGDip is nine calendar months (i.e. completed programme taught element).
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/programmes/departments/business-economics/business-analytics-consulting/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

  • To equip students with a broad range of knowledge and analytics methodologies, techniques and tools to enable them to work effectively in supporting problem-solving and decision-making in a business or policy context;

  • To build students’ analytics consulting skills in a number of areas within business and government (e.g.  marketing, operations, policy);

  • To enable students to exploit the opportunities offered by the availability of ‘big data’ within and between organisations (e.g. managing big data, leading analytics initiatives);

  • To produce graduates with the ability to use rigorous quantitative and qualitative model-supported analyses to help tackle complex problem or decision situations within organisations; 

  • To enhance students’ lifelong learning skills and personal development in preparation for a professional career in analytics within business and government, or as preparation for further research in the field of analytics;

  • To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme  through close links with many analytics experts or users in business and government, and with a taught content and practical experience that enable students to identify opportunities for the deployment of analytics in practice.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The QAA benchmark statement for Master's awards in business and management.

  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.

  • University Learning and Teaching Strategy.

  • Teaching and learning policies of the School of Business and Economics.

  • The increasing take-up of analytics within business and government.

  • The research interests and specialisms of the School of Business and Economics academic staff and their professional involvement in their disciplines.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas: 

K1        The main business or policy application areas in industry, and of current and leading edge research in these areas.

K2        A range of analytics approaches, techniques and tools for analysing big data, together with their expected benefits and limitations.

K3        Current thinking and issues relevant to big data.

K4        The role of the analytics professional and the process of deploying effective analytics projects in organisations.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

 

C1       Construct original analytics-driven insights that draw on appropriate evidence from a variety of sources.

C2       Critically analyse, evaluate, and synthetize the practice of analytics.

C3       Critically appraise the relative importance and relevance of different sources of data to the deployment of analytics, and recognise and address issues relevant to management of big data.

C4       Recognise opportunities to apply a wide range of analytics approaches in organisations, deployed effectively and critically in either expert or facilitative modes, to a wide range of problem and decision situations.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

P1        Apply model-supported problem structuring and decision analysis skills to formulate complex or unstructured problem or decision situations, distinguish facts from values, define objectives, preferences, constraints and assumptions, and create and evaluate options.

P2        Make effective use of information and communication technologies, including the appropriate selection and competent application of a range of relevant computer software for deploying analytics.

P3      Conduct research effectively and efficiently into the field of analytics, using a variety of data, information and knowledge sources.

P4        Undertake, and manage effectively, an analytics-driven project in a problem or decision situation within a business or policy context, selecting and employing various methodologies, techniques and tools as appropriate, and developing helpful interactions with analytics users or experts

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

T1        Communicate complex ideas and arguments effectively, both orally and in writing and using a range of media, to expert and lay audiences.

T2        Work effectively with others in a team environment, recognising and utilising individuals’ contributions in group processes, and displaying effective negotiation and project management skills when needed.  

T3:       Demonstrate high personal effectiveness, including critical self-awareness, self-reflection and self-management, sensitivity to diversity in people and situations, time management, and the ability to take responsibility for their own learning, and to continue learning through reflection on practice and experience.

T4:       Use information technology to scan, organise and assess relevant information for problem solving, decision making and sharing knowledge.

T5:       Analyse complex problems and develop novel solutions, and apply numerical reasoning appropriately in problem solving processes. 

Learning outcomes associated with the PGDip do not include K4, C4, P4 and T5.,

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4. Programme structure

The MSc programme lasts one-year full-time, and is divided into a taught and project component. Students take 8 compulsory taught modules delivered across two semesters, which amount to 120 credits. In the summer students take a supervised analytics consulting or research project worth 60 credits. 

 

Code

Tittle

Modular weight

Semester

BSP410

Consulting for Analytics

15

1

BSP411

Discovery Analytics

15

1

BSP412

Decision Analytics

15

1

BSP413

Managing Big Data

15

1

BSP414

Customer Analytics

15

2

BSP415

Operations Analytics

15

2

BSP416

Policy and Strategy Analytics

15

2

BSP417

Leading Analytics Initiatives

15

2

BSP418

Analytics Project

60

2

 

The PGDip is awarded after successful completion of all eight 15-credit taught modules.

 

 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI. In addition, and in accordance with Regulation XXI, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University's special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MBA/ MBA with Internship (2015 entry)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Association of MBAs (AMBA)

Final award MBA/PGDip/PGCert
Programme title Business Administration/Business Administration with Internship
Programme code BSPT20, BSPT22,BSPT24
Length of programme The Loughborough MBA programme is offered on a full-time and a part-time basis. The programme commences in October of each academic year. The period of study for the award of MBA is twelve calendar months when studied as a full-time programme and twenty-four to thirty-six calendar months when studied as a part-time programme. The period of study for the MBA with Internship is 24 calendar months inclusive of the Internship.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

MBA Full-time: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/businesseconomics/masterofbusinessadministrationmba/

MBA Part-time: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/businesseconomics/

masterofbusinessadministrationpart-time/

 

With the permission of the MBA Director, 40 credits may be obtained towards the award of MBA on the basis of successful completion of all modules of the following qualifications.  When credit is awarded to candidates under this provision, it will normally replace that awarded for modules that most closely correspond with the prior study, as defined by the MBA Director.

  • Loughborough University

-       Professional Diploma in Management

-       Postgraduate Diploma in Management

-       Postgraduate Diploma in Management and Leadership

-       Postgraduate Diploma in Industrial Sales and Marketing

-       MSc in Management (Professional)

-       MSc in Management and Leadership

-       MSc in Management or International Management or Marketing and Management or Finance and Management or Business Analysis and Management 

  • Engineering Management Partnership (EMP) Certificate in Engineering Management.
Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • Attract sufficient richly experienced managers from a wide range of educational, business and commercial backgrounds to create a positive learning environment for all participants.
  • Provide such managers with a challenging educational experience in terms of general intellectual and personal development, within the context of the academic study of business and management.
  • Enable participants to develop a thorough conceptual understanding of the core management disciplines and activities internationally, and to permit detailed study of chosen specialisations.
  • Enhance the management skills of participants through their ongoing employment within the business, commercial and public sectors, and through an emphasis in all subjects onmanagerial relevance.
  • Develop highly trained and adaptable managers who are able to meet the management and professional needs of organisations that are facing the challenges of the future.
  • Develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
  • Encourage in our students hard work, enthusiasm and self-motivation, a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and openness to new ideas
  • Enhance students’ lifelong learning skills and personal development so as to be able to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to business and society at large.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Master’s awards in business and management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
  • Association of Business School (ABS) guidelines
  • Association of MBAs (AMBA) accreditation guidelines
  • School of Business and Economics ('The School') Mission Statement of General Aims for Postgraduate Programmes
  • The University Academic Quality Procedures

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of:

  • the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
  • the external context in which organisations operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
  • how organisations are managed - including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the external context.
  • the contexts and processes in which enterprsie and innovation are able to thrive and prosper - including managerial style, organisational culture and stakeholder expectations.

 

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
  • analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in business and management by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
  • collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current business or management situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques based and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business contextincluding word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
  • use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management in group work situations.
  • effectively engage with organisations adopting new approaches to managing enterprise and produce a group consultancy repoort on an orgnaisational strategic initiative. 

 

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
  • be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
  • apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
  • solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
  • scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
  • recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
  • use effective team-working skills including leadership, team building and project management;
  • recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
  • use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Content

Code

Module title

Modular weight

Semester

Core/Option

BSP300

Business Analytics

10

1

C

BSP302

Accounting and Performance Manangement

10

1

C

BSP303

Management of Human Resources

10

1

C

BSP304

Business Economics

10

1

C

BSP317

Leading Strategic Change

20

1

C

BSP319

Business Administration Project

 30 

1

C

 

 

 

 

 

BSP301

Marketing

10

2

C

BSP308

Corporate Finance

10

2

C

BSP313

Problem Solving for Leaders

 10 

 2 

 C 

BSP321

Contemporary Perspectives on Leadership

10

2

C

BSP109

International Management

10

2

O

BSP111

Career Management

10

2

O

BSP112

Information Systems Management & Strategy

10

2

O

BSP220

Media Management

10

2

O

 

 

 

 

 

BSP314

Managing Innovation

20

 3 

 C 

BSI335

MBA Internship

0

3

C

BSP110

Project Management

10

3

O

BSP115

ESSAM

 20 

3

 O 

BSP305

Operations Management

10

3

O

BSP231 Work Based Assignment 1     10       3          O

BSP232

Work Based Assignment 2

20

3

O

 

MBA Optional  Modules                                                     

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students on the MBA Programme will undertake optional modules (listed in this programme specification) with a total module weight of 30 credits.  Option choices may be subject to change and/or timetabling constraints.

MBA with Internship

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students on the MBA with Internship will undertake the MBA Internship module BSI335. The professional placement will start either at the end of semester 2 or at the end of semester 3.

4.2 The School reserves the right to offer or to withdraw any module. 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 Assessment

5.1.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

- To be eligible for the award of MBA candidates must have achieved credit in BSP319.

- To be eligilble for the award of MBA with Professional Placement candidates must additionally have successfully completed BSI335, the MBA Professional Placement module. Candidates who have not successfully completed BSI335 the MBA Professional Placement module but who otherwise satisfy the requirements of the MBA regulations will be eligible for the award of MBA. 

5.1.2 In accordance with Regulation XXI, but with the exclusion of module BSP319 Project, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University's special assessment period. 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

n/a

Programme Specification

BS MBA/ MBA International Sports Management/ MBA with Internship(2012-2014 entry)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Association of MBAs (AMBA)

Final award MBA/PGDip/PGCert
Programme title Business Administration/ Business Administration (International Sports Management)/ Business Administration with Internship
Programme code BSPT20, BSPT22, BSPT23, BSPT24
Length of programme The Loughborough MBA programme is offered on a full-time and a part-time basis. The Loughborough MBA (International Sports Management) is only offered on a part-time basis. The full-time programme commences in October of each academic year and the part-time programme in both October and February. The International Sports Management MBA commences in October of each academic year.
The period of study for the award of MBA is twelve calendar months when studied as a full-time programme and twenty-four to thirty-six calendar months when studied as a part-time programme. The period of study for the MBA with Internship is 24 calendar months inclusive of the Internship.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

MBA Full-time: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/businesseconomics/masterofbusinessadministrationmba/

MBA Part-time: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/businesseconomics/

masterofbusinessadministrationpart-time/

MBA International Sports: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/internationalsportsmanagementmba/

 

With the permission of the MBA Director, 40 credits may be obtained towards the award of MBA on the basis of successful completion of all modules of the following qualifications.  When credit is awarded to candidates under this provision, it will normally replace that awarded for modules that most closely correspond with the prior study, as defined by the MBA Director.

  • Loughborough University

-       Professional Diploma in Management

-       Postgraduate Diploma in Management

-       Postgraduate Diploma in Management and Leadership

-       Postgraduate Diploma in Industrial Sales and Marketing

-       MSc in Management (Professional)

-       MSc in Management and Leadership

-       MSc in Management or International Management or Marketing and Management or Finance and Management or Business Analysis and Management 

  • Engineering Management Partnership (EMP) Certificate in Engineering Management.
Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • Attract sufficient richly experienced managers from a wide range of educational, business and commercial backgrounds to create a positive learning environment for all participants.
  • Provide such managers with a challenging educational experience in terms of general intellectual and personal development, within the context of the academic study of business and management.
  • Enable participants to develop a thorough conceptual understanding of the core management disciplines and activities internationally, and to permit detailed study of chosen specialisations.
  • Enhance the management skills of participants through their ongoing employment within the business, commercial and public sectors, and through an emphasis in all subjects onmanagerial relevance.
  • Develop highly trained and adaptable managers who are able to meet the management and professional needs of organisations that are facing the challenges of the future.
  • Develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
  • Encourage in our students hard work, enthusiasm and self-motivation, a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and openness to new ideas
  • Enhance students’ lifelong learning skills and personal development so as to be able to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to business and society at large.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Master’s awards in business and management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
  • Association of Business School (ABS) guidelines
  • Association of MBAs (AMBA) accreditation guidelines
  • School of Business and Economics ('The School') Mission Statement of General Aims for Postgraduate Programmes
  • The University Academic Quality Procedures

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of:

  • A1 - the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
  • A2 - the external context in which organisations operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
  • A3 - how organisations are managed - including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the external context.
  • A4 - the contexts and processes in which enterprsie and innovation are able to thrive and prosper - including managerial style, organisational culture and stakeholder expectations.

For the MBA (International Sports Management):

  • A5 - the International Sports Management environment, including regulation, governance and legal frameworks. 

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
  • analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in business and management by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
  • collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current business or management situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques based and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business contextincluding word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
  • use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management in group work situations.

For the full-time MBA: 

  • effectively engage with organisations adopting new approaches to managing enterprise and produce a group consultancy repoort on an orgnaisational strategic initiative. 

For the MBA (International Sports Management):

  • effectively engage with organisations int he sports management sector to produce a group consultancy report on an organisational strategic initiative. 
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
  • be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
  • apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
  • solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
  • scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
  • recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
  • use effective team-working skills including leadership, team building and project management;
  • recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
  • use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Content

Code

Module title

Modular weight

Semester

Full-time MBA

Part-time MBA

MBA (International Sports Management)

 

BSP300

Business Analytics

10

1

c

N/A

N/A

BSP301

Marketing

10

2

c

N/A

N/A

BSP302

Accounting and Performance Manangement

10

1

c

N/A

N/A

BSP303

Management of Human Resources

10

1

c

N/A

N/A

BSP304

Business Economics

10

1

c

N/A

N/A

BSP308

Corporate Finance

10

2

c

N/A

N/A

 BSP313

 Problem Solving for Leaders

10 

N/A 

N/A 

BSP314

Managing Innovation

20

2

c

N/A

N/A

BSP317

Leading Strategic Change

20

1

c

N/A

N/A

BSP319

Business Administration Project and Research Methods

30

3

c

N/A

N/A

 BSP321

 Contemporary Perspectives on Leadership

10 

N/A 

N/A 

BSP115

Advanced Management

20

3

c

option

N/A

BSP100

Business Analytics

10

1

N/A

c

N/A

BSP101

Marketing

10

1

N/A

c

N/A

BSP102

Accounting for Managers

10

2

N/A

c

N/A

BSP103

Management of Human Resources

10

2

N/A

c

N/A

BSP104

Business Economics

10

1

N/A

c

N/A

BSP105

Operations Management

10

2

N/A

c

N/A

 BSP113

 Problem Solving for Leaders

10 

 2

 N/A

o

BSP114

Managing Innovation

20

2

N/A

c

N/A

BSP119

Business Administration Project and Research Methods

30

3

N/A

c

N/A

 BSP121

 Contemporary Perspectives on Leadership

10 

 3

N/A 

BSP200

Business Analytics

10

Y1,S2

N/A

N/A

c

BSP201

Marketing

10

Y1,S2

N/A

N/A

c

BSP202

Accounting for Managers

10

Y1,S1

N/A

N/A

c

BSP203

Human Resource Management in Sports Organisations

10

Y1,S2

N/A

N/A

c

BSP204

Sports Management Environment

10

Y1,S1

N/A

N/A

c

BSP205

Operations Management

10

Y1,S1

N/A

N/A

c

BSP210

Project Management

10

Y2,S1

N/A

N/A

c

BSP220

Media Management

10

Y2,S2

N/A

N/A

c

BSP214

Managing Sports Technology and Innovation

20

Y2,S2

N/A

N/A

c

BSP217

Leading Strategic Change

20

Y2,S1

N/A

N/A

c

BSP215

International Sports Management

30

Y2,S3

N/A

N/A

c

BSP225

Sports Management Project

30

Y2,S3

N/A

N/A

c

BSP231

Work Based Assignment 1

10

3

N/A

o

o

BSP232 Work Based Assignment 2      20        3     N/A       o           o

 

MBA Optional  Modules                                                     

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students on the part-time MBA Programme will undertake optional modules from the current School catalogue of available MBA options with a total module weight of 60 credits.  Students on the full-time/full-time with internship MBA programme will undertake optional modules from the current school catalogue of available MBA options with a module module weight of 30 credits.

MBA Module Selection

Students registered on the part-time or International Sports Management MBA may select modules from any programme within the MBA suite.  However students must complete the core modules of their programme, therefore where appropriate, choices must be equivalent to the core modules of their registered programme.

MBA with Internship

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students on the MBA with Internship will undertake the MBA Professional Placement module BSI335. The professional placement will start either at the end of semester 2 or at the end of semester 3.

4.2 The School reserves the right to offer or to withdraw any module. 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 Assessment

5.1.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

- To be eligible for the award of MBA candidates must have achieved credit in BSP119, BSP319 or BSP225.

- To be eligilble for the award of MBA with Professional Placement candidates must additionally have successfully completed BSI335, the MBA Professional Placement module. Candidates who have not successfully completed BSI335 the MBA Professional Placement module but who otherwise satisfy the requirements of the MBA regulations will be eligible for the award of MBA. 

5.1.2 In accordance with Regulation XXI, but with the exclusion of modules BSP119, BSP319 and BSP225 Project, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University's special assessment period. 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

n/a

Programme Specification

BS MSc Money, Banking and Finance

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGCert/ PGDip
Programme title Money, Banking and Finance
Programme code ECPT43
Length of programme The Programme is offered on a full-time basis only (except for purposes of re-assessment), commencing at the beginning of each academic session. The minimum period of registration is 9 calendar months for the award of PGDip and 12 calendar months for the award of MSc.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/moneybankingfinance/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

  • To develop knowledge of theories and their application in money, banking, and finance
  • To give students general training that is vocationally relevant to employment in the financial services sectors of government, commerce and industry
  • To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis that will allow them to undertake applied research for their employers in the areas of monetary policy, banking, and finance.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The academic level at which the Master of Science (MSc) programme is taught and assessed is guided by the criteria for the degree of Master in The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications in England Wales and Northern Ireland, published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Understand and explain the functions and operations of financial institutions and systems, with special reference to central banks, commercial banks and other financial intermediaries
  • Understand and explain the core theories of financial economics with respect to risk management, asset pricing and investment, and to be able to use these theories to assist them in asset management
  • Understand the inter-relationships between banking, the financial system, the conduct of monetary policy and the investment decisions of individual and institutional investors
  • Undertake applied research in money, banking and finance, using research tools and quantitative methods appropriate to the conduct of such research.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Analyse theoretical and practical problems in money, banking and finance, by using the theories and quantitative methods appropriate to those disciplines
  • Synthesise important issues and themes from the professional and academic literature in money, banking, and finance
  • Use the professional and academic literature in money, banking and finance, to formulate questions suitable for empirical research
  • Critically analyse professional and academic research papers in money, banking and finance financial markets.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Present word-processed written reports using structure, paragraphing and citation, appropriate to professional and academic standards in money banking and finance
  • Construct tables of statistical data, interpret such data, and carry out statistical hypothesis testing.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Apply skills in analysis and problem formulation to areas of general debate in disciplines other than those the of the named award
  • Use skills in synthesis to formulate key issues in areas of general debate in disciplines other than those the of the named award

More generally, students should have further developed skills in:

  • Numeracy
  • Logical thinking and problem solving
  • Use of information technology (retrieval of data, web-based information searching, handling of data, word-processing and spreadsheet methods)
  • Written and oral communication
  • Time management and decision-making
  • Independent study
  • Group study.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Semester 1 (Total Modular Weight 60)

Compulsory Modules

CODE

TITLE

MODULAR WEIGHT

ECP102

Essentials of Financial Economics

15

ECP106

Economics of Money and Finance

15

ECP201

The Financial System

15

ECP101

Methods of Data Analysis

15

ECP104

Research Communication (continued in Semester 2)

 

  

4.2 Semester 2 (Total Modular Weight 75)

Compulsory Modules

CODE

TITLE

MODULAR WEIGHT

ECP104

Research Communication (continued) from Semester 1)

 15

ECP154

Developments in Financial Markets

15

At least one of:

ECP150

International Money

15

ECP152

Monetary Policy

15

 

Optional Modules

*One module (if both ECP150 and ECP152 are selected) or two modules (if only one of ECP150 or ECP152 are selected), each with a weight of 15, must be chosen from the MSc Module List (semester 2) to be published by the School before the end of semester 1.

 

4.3 Assessed Research Practice (Total Modular Weight 45)

During the summer period the student will be required to undertake supervised research practice, to be assessed by examination in two modules, following the completion of the research communication module. 

CODE

TITLE

MODULAR WEIGHT

ECP104

Research Communication

(Examined in Semester 2)

 

ECP303

Assessed Research Practice I

15

ECP304

Assessed Research Practice II

30

  

a) Research seminars will be provided in research subjects to be published by the School before the end of the third week of semester two.

b) Students must attend research seminars in one subject area and contribute to them by carrying out and reporting on research work, in Loughborough, under the guidance of the seminar convenor.

c) Attainment in the chosen seminar subject will be assessed in two modules, ECP303 and ECP304, each covering a different aspect of the chosen subject. ECP303 will examine specialist subject knowledge and ECP304 will examine research skills.

d)    Students will be allocated by the module organiser to a research subject relevant to monetary economics, banking, finance or financial markets.

e) A candidate who fails an examination will be permitted to undertake re-assessment on one occasion only. The candidate may choose to be re-assessed either at a special re-assessment exam to be held in October or at the normal next assessment of these modules during the next academic year.

f) Re-assessment with tuition is permitted during the next normal tuition period but tuition may not be available in the same research topic that was initially assessed.

g) The School reserves the right not to offer assessed research practice in every subject area covered by taught modules.

 

General Provisions

 

The School of Business and Economics reserves the right to offer or withdraw any taught module.

The School of Business and Economics may exercise its discretion in waiving prerequisites for its modules under exceptional circumstances. 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1  In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.  However for the Postgraduate Diploma candidates must accumulate 105 credits plus marks of 40-49% in modules worth a total of at least 15 credits.

5.2 Candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s Special Assessment Period.

5.3 All examinations and tests must be taken at Loughborough University unless special permission is obtained in advance from the Programme Director.

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Economics & Finance/Financial Economics/ International Finance & Economics/Monetary Economics

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Economics and Finance/ Financial Economics/ International Finance and Economics/ Monetary Economics (NB: MSc International Finance and Economics and MSc Monetary Economics will not be available in 2015/16)
Programme code Degree Paths: Economics and Finance(ECTP31) Financial Economics(ECTP37) International Finance and Economics(ECPT38) Monetary Economics(ECPT39)
Length of programme The Programme is offered on a full-time basis only (except for purposes of re-assessment and in cases of credit transfer), commencing at the beginning of each academic session. The minimum period of registration is 9 calendar months for the award of PGDip and 12 calendar months for the award of MSc. The name of the award will depend on the optional modules chosen and the subject area of the dissertation, in accordance with criteria below.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economicsandfinance/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

  • To provide basic training for doctoral level research, including a sound foundation in research methods and economic theory, with a choice of fields of specialisation in economics and finance.
  • To allow students to be awarded MSc in Economics and Finance, MSc in Financial Economics, MSc in International Finance and Economics, and MSc in Monetary Economics, depending on their chosen specialisation.
  • To equip students with appropriate tools allowing them to understand and analyse contemporary issues in economic policy.
  • To develop in students a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The academic level at which the MSc programme is taught and assessed is guided by the criteria for the degree of Master in The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications in England, Wales and Northern Ireland, published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of advances in core microeconomic and macroeconomic theory
  • Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of either the operations of financial markets, institutions and systems around the World or core theories of financial economics with respect to risk management, asset pricing and investment
  • Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques necessary to allow for formal analysis of the above mentioned material
  • Undertake independent research in economics and finance, using appropriate research tools and quantitative methods.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Analyse theoretical and practical problems in economics and finance by using the theories and quantitative methods appropriate to those disciplines
  • Synthesise important issues and themes from the professional and academic literature in economics and finance
  • Use the professional and academic literature in economics and finance to formulate questions suitable for empirical research
  • Critically analyse professional and academic research papers in economics and finance.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Present word-processed written reports using structure, paragraphing and citation, appropriate to professional and academic standards in economics and finance
  • Construct tables of statistical data, interpret such data, and carry out statistical hypothesis testing.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Apply skills in analysis (including statistical analysis) and problem formulation to areas of general debate other than economics and finance
  • Use skills in synthesis to formulate key issues in areas of general debate other than economics and finance.
  • Enhance skills in oral presentation of reports on group work, subject to deadlines.

More generally, students should have further developed skills in:

  • Numeracy;
  • Logical thinking and problem solving
  • Use of information technology (retrieval of data, data analysis using statistical packages and computer files, web-based information searching, basic word-processing and spreadsheet methods)
  • Written communication
  • Time management and decision-making
  • Independent study
  • Group study.

4. Programme structure

Note: MSc International Finance & Economics and MSc Monetary Economics have been suspended for the 2015/16 academic year.

4.1      Semester 1 (Total Modular Weight 60)

            a) Compulsory Modules 

CODE

TITLE

MODULAR WEIGHT

ECP204

Microeconomic Analysis

15

ECP205

Macroeconomic Analysis

15

ECP206

Research Methods

15

ECP104

Research Communication (continued in Semester 2)

 

           b) Optional Module

            One module with a total modular weight of 15 to be chosen from the list below. 

CODE

TITLE

MODULAR WEIGHT

ECP201

The Financial System

15

ECP202

Financial Economics

15

MAP104

Introduction to Measure Theory and Martingales (subject to permission by Programme Director)

15

MAP114

Stochastic Models in Finance (subject to permission by Programme Director)

15

 4.2      Semester 2 (Total Modular Weight 75)

            a) Compulsory Modules  

CODE

TITLE

MODULAR WEIGHT

ECP256

Further Quantitative Techniques for Finance and Economics

15

ECP104

Research Communication (continued from Semester 1)

15

           b) Optional Modules 

            Three modules with a total modular weight of 45 to be chosen from the list below.  

CODE

TITLE

MODULAR WEIGHT

ECP158

Applied Banking and Financial Modelling

15

ECP251

Asset Management and Derivatives

15

ECP253

Comparative Banking

15

ECP254

Banking and Financial Markets

15

ECP255

Corporate Finance

15

ECP260

Development Finance

15

MAP204

Stochastic Calculus and Theory of Stochastic Pricing (Pre-Req MAP104)

15

  4.3       Assessed Research (Total Modular Weight 45)

During the summer period candidates will be required to submit a dissertation. 

                Dissertation

CODE

TITLE

MODULAR WEIGHT

ECP305

Dissertation

45

  • The subject of the dissertation will be a topic in economics or finance, and will be supervised by a full-time member of staff in the School of Business and Economics.

    All work for the dissertation must be undertaken on a full-time basis at Loughborough University, except in very special circumstances and with the prior agreement of the dissertation supervisor and module organiser.

  • Two copies of the dissertation, in approved form, should be submitted.

  • A candidate whose Dissertation is failed with a mark of 40-49% will be permitted to submit a revised version on one occasion only. A candidate whose Dissertation is failed with a mark of less than 40% will be permitted to submit a Dissertation on a new topic on one occasion only. In either case the date for re-submission will be set by the Review Board.

     Dissertation Registration Criteria

  • The student must submit a research proposal by 5:00 pm on the first Friday of the summer term. This proposed topic must be accepted by a dissertation supervisor and the module organiser, according to conditions set out in the module specifications for ECP305 (Dissertation).  A student who does not submit an acceptable proposal will be allocated a dissertation topic, chosen by the module organiser.

  • No more than three students will normally be allocated to any one supervisor.

  • A dissertation that is not written on the accepted topic cannot be submitted without the prior approval of both the module organiser and the dissertation supervisor.

    General Provisions

    The School of Business and Economics reserves the right to offer or withdraw any taught module.

    The School of Business and Economics may exercise its discretion in waiving prerequisites for its modules under exceptional circumstances. 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.  However for the Postgraduate Diploma: candidates must accumulate 105 credits plus marks of 40-49% in modules worth a total of at least 15 credits.

5.2 Candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a taught module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s Special Assessment Period.

5.3 All examinations and tests must be taken at Loughborough University unless special permission is obtained in advance from the Programme Director.

5.4 The MSc/PGDip in Economics and Finance will normally be awarded following successful completion of programme requirements. However candidates who have successfully completed named modules may qualify for MSc awards as specified in 5.5 below. 

5.5 The MSc in Financial Economics may be awarded following successful completion of programme requirements to include the modules Financial Economics (ECP202) and at least one of Asset Management and Derivatives (ECP251) or Corporate Finance (ECP255) and a Dissertation (ECP305) in an acceptable field of financial economics.

5.6 The MSc in International Finance and Economics may be awarded following successful completion of programme requirements to include the module International Finance (ECP250) and a Dissertation (ECP305) in an acceptable field of international finance or international economics.

5.7 The MSc in Monetary Economics may be awarded following successful completion of programme requirements to include the modules Monetary Theory and Policy (ECP252) and International Finance (ECP250) and a Dissertation (ECP305) in an acceptable field of monetary economics.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Applied Finance and Banking

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGCert / PGDip
Programme title Applied Finance and Banking
Programme code ECPT42
Length of programme The Programme is offered on a full-time basis only (except for purposes of re-assessment), commencing at the beginning of each academic session. The minimum period of registration is 9 calendar months for the award of PGDip and 12 calendar months for the award of MSc.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/bankingandfinance/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

  • To develop knowledge of theories and their application in banking, and financial markets
  • To give students general training that is vocationally relevant to employment in the financial services sectors of government, commerce and industry
  • To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis that will allow them to undertake applied research for their employers in the areas of banking and financial markets.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The academic level at which the Master of Science (MSc) programme is taught and assessed is guided by the criteria for the degree of Master in The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications in England Wales and Northern Ireland, published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Understand and explain the functions and operations of institutions, financial markets and systems, with special reference to central banks, commercial banks and other financial intermediaries
  • Understand and explain the core theories of financial economics with respect to risk management, asset pricing and investment, and to be able to use these theories to assist them in asset management
  • Understand the inter-relationships between banking, the financial system and the investment decisions of individual and institutional investors
  • Undertake applied research in banking and financial markets, using research tools and quantitative methods appropriate to the conduct of such research.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Analyse theoretical and practical problems in banking and financial markets, by using the theories and quantitative methods appropriate to those disciplines;
  • Synthesise important issues and themes from the professional and academic literature in banking and financial markets;
  • Use the professional and academic literature in banking and financial markets, to formulate questions suitable for empirical research;
  • Critically analyse professional and academic research papers in banking and financial markets.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Present word-processed written reports using structure, paragraphing and citation, appropriate to professional and academic standards in banking and financial markets
  • Construct tables of statistical data, interpret such data, and carry out statistical hypothesis testing.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Apply skills in analysis and problem formulation to areas of general debate in disciplines other than those the of the named award
  • Use skills in synthesis to formulate key issues in areas of general debate in disciplines other than those the of the named award
  • Enhance skills in oral presentation of reports on group work, subject to deadlines

More generally, students should have further developed skills in:

  • Numeracy
  • Logical thinking and problem solving
  • Use of information technology (retrieval of data, web-based information searching, handling of data, word-processing and spreadsheet methods)
  • Written and oral communication
  • Time management and decision-making
  • Independent study
  • Group study.

4. Programme structure

4.1       Semester 1 (Total Modular Weight 60)

            Compulsory Modules 

           

CODE

TITLE

MODULAR WEIGHT

ECP100

Economics of Banking and Financial Markets

15

ECP102

Essentials of Financial Economics

15

ECP201

The Financial System

15

ECP101

Methods of Data Analysis

15

ECP104

Research Communication (continued in Semester 2)

 

  

4.2       Semester 2 (Total Modular Weight 75)

            a) Compulsory Modules

CODE

TITLE

MODULAR WEIGHT

ECP104

Research Communication (continued from Semester 1)   

 15

ECP151

introduction to Derivatives and Market Risk

15

 ECP155

 Credit Risk Management

15 

       

  

            b) Optional Modules

Two modules each with a weight of 15, must be chosen from the MSc Module List (semester 2) to be published by the School before the end of semester 1.

 

4.3       Assessed Research Practice (Total Modular Weight 45)

During the summer period the student will be required to undertake supervised research practice, to be assessed by examination in two modules, following the completion of the research communication module. 

CODE

TITLE

MODULAR WEIGHT

ECP104

Research Communication (Examined in Semester 2)

 

ECP303

Assessed Research Practice I

15

ECP304

Assessed Research Practice II

30

a) Research seminars will be provided in research subjects to be published by the School before the end of the third week of semester two.

b) Students must attend research seminars in one subject area and contribute to them by carrying out and reporting on research work, in Loughborough, under the guidance of the seminar convenor.

c)  Attainment in the chosen seminar subject will be assessed in two modules, ECP303 and ECP304, each covering a different aspect of the chosen subject. ECP303 will examine specialist subject knowledge and ECP304 will examine research skills.

d) Students will be allocated by the module organiser to a research subject relevant to financial economics, banking, finance or financial markets.

e)  A candidate who fails an examination will be permitted to undertake re-assessment on one occasion only. The candidate may choose to be re-assessed either at a special re-assessment exam to be in October or at the normal next assessment of these modules during the next academic year.

f) Re-assessment with tuition is permitted during the next normal tuition period but tuition may not be available in the same research topic that was initially assessed.

g)  The School reserves the right not to offer assessed research practice in every subject area covered by taught modules.

 

General Provisions

The School of Business and Economics reserves the right to offer or withdraw any optional taught module.

The School of Business and Economics may exercise its discretion in waiving prerequisites for its modules under exceptional circumstances. 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.  However for the Postgraduate Diploma: candidates must accumulate 105 credits plus marks of 40-49% in modules worth a total of at least 15 credits.

5.2 Candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s Special Assessment Period.

5.3 All examinations and tests must be taken at Loughborough University unless special permission is obtained in advance from the Programme Director.

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Banking and Finance

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PG Dip/ PG Cert
Programme title Banking and Finance
Programme code ECPT36
Length of programme The Programme is offered on a full-time basis only (except for purposes of re-assessment and in cases of credit transfer), commencing at the beginning of each academic session. The minimum period of registration is 9 calendar months for the award of PGDip and 12 calendar months for the award of the MSc.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/bankingandfinance/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

  • To develop knowledge of theories of banking, finance and research methods, and the application of these theories, beyond bachelor degree level, to provide basic training for doctoral level research
  • To give students general training that is vocationally relevant to employment in the financial services sectors of government, commerce and industry
  • To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis that will allow them to undertake applied research for their employers in the areas of banking and finance

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The academic level at which the MSc programme is taught and assessed is guided by the criteria for the degree of Master in The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications in England Wales and Northern Ireland, published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Understand and explain the functions and operations of institutions, financial markets and systems, with special reference to central banks, commercial banks and other financial intermediaries
  • Understand and explain the core theories of financial economics with respect to risk management, asset pricing and investment, and to be able to use these theories to assist them in asset management
  • Undertake independent applied research in banking and finance, using basic research tools and quantitative methods appropriate to the conduct of independent research.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Analyse theoretical and practical problems in banking and finance by using the theories and quantitative methods appropriate to those disciplines
  • Synthesise important issues and themes from the professional and academic literature in banking and finance
  • Use the professional and academic literature in banking and finance to formulate questions suitable for empirical research
  • Critically analyse professional and academic research papers in banking and finance.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Present word-processed written reports using structure, paragraphing and citation, appropriate to professional and academic standards in banking and finance
  • Construct tables of statistical data, interpret such data, and carry out basic forms of statistical hypothesis testing.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Apply skills in analysis (including statistical analysis) and problem formulation to areas of general debate other than banking and finance
  • Use skills in synthesis to formulate key issues in areas of general debate other than banking and finance.
  • Enhance skills in oral presentation of reports on group work, subject to deadlines.

More generally, students should have further developed skills in:

  • Numeracy
  • Logical thinking and problem solving
  • Use of information technology (retrieval of data, web-based information searching, handling of data in computer files, basic word-processing and spreadsheet methods)
  • Written communication
  • Time management and decision-making
  • Independent study
  • Group study.

4. Programme structure

4.1       Semester 1 (Total Modular Weight 60)

            a) Compulsory Modules           

CODE

TITLE

MODULAR WEIGHT

ECP201

The Financial System

15

ECP202

Financial Economics

15

ECP104

Research Communication (continued in Semester 2)

 

ECP206

Research Methods

15

             b) Optional Module

            One module with a total modular weight of 15 to be chosen from the list below. 

CODE

TITLE

MODULAR WEIGHT

ECP204

Microeconomic Analysis (subject to permission by Programme Director)

15

ECP205

Macroeconomic Analysis

15

MAP104

Introduction to Measure Theory and Martingales (subject to permission by Programme Director)

15 

MAP114

Stochastic Models in Finance (subject to permission by Programme Director)

15

4.2       Semester 2 (Total Modular Weight 75)

            a) Compulsory Modules 

CODE

TITLE

MODULAR WEIGHT

ECP254

Banking and Financial Markets

15

ECP104

Research Communication (continued from Sem 1)

15

ECP256

Further Quantitative Techniques for Finance and Economics

15

At least one of: 

 

ECP251

Asset Management and Derivatives 

15

ECP255

Corporate Finance     

15

             b) Optional Module

            One module with a total modular weight of 15 to be chosen from the list below.

CODE

TITLE

MODULAR WEIGHT

ECP158

Applied Banking and Financial Modelling

15

ECP253

Comparative Banking

15

ECP260

Development Finance

15

MAP204

Stochastic Calculus and Theory of Stochastic Pricing (Pre-Req MAP104)

15

 

4.3       Assessed Research (Total Modular Weight 45)

During the summer period candidates will be required either to submit a dissertation or to attend one research practice seminar followed by examination. 

           a) Dissertation 

CODE

TITLE

MODULAR WEIGHT

ECP305

Dissertation

45

  • The subject of the dissertation will be a topic in banking or finance and will be supervised by a full-time member of staff of the School of Business and Economics.

  • Two copies of the dissertation, in approved form, should be submitted.

  • A candidate whose Dissertation is failed with a mark of 40-49% will be permitted to submit a revised version on one occasion only. A candidate whose Dissertation is failed with a mark of less than 40% will be permitted to submit a Dissertation on a new topic on one occasion only. In either case the date for re-submission will be set by the Review Board. 

               b) Research Practice Seminar           

CODE

TITLE

MODULAR WEIGHT

ECP301

Specialist Subject Knowledge

15

ECP302

Research Skills          

30

  • Research practice seminars will be provided in seminar subject groups, on subjects to be published by the School before the end of semester one.

  • Students must attend and contribute to one research practice seminar group on a subject specifically related to banking, economics or finance. The seminar subject will be assessed by examination in the modules ECP301 and ECP302, worth 15 and 30 credits respectively.

  • Students will be allocated to a seminar group at the sole discretion of the organiser for modules ECP301 and ECP302.

  • A candidate who fails an examination will be permitted to undertake re-assessment on one occasion only. The candidate may choose to be re-assessed either at a special re-assessment exam to be held in October or at the normal next assessment of these modules during the next academic year.

  • Re-assessment with tuition is permitted during the next normal tuition period, if required, but tuition may not be available in the same research topic that was initially assessed.

  • The School reserves the right not to offer a research seminar in every subject area covered by taught modules and to offer a research practice seminar in subject areas not covered by taught modules.

    All work for the dissertation and research practice seminar modules must be undertaken on a full-time basis at Loughborough University, except in very special circumstances and with the prior agreement of the dissertation supervisor and module organiser.

     Dissertation Registration Criteria

  • All students will be registered initially as candidates for the research practice seminar modules ECP301 and ECP302.

  • To be eligible to register for the dissertation a student must have obtained credit in nine taught modules including ECP104, normally with an overall average mark of not less than 60% and subject to the approval of the MSc Dissertation Co-ordinator.

  • Students who have not indicated their preference for the dissertation on the Semester 2 Options Form will not be eligible to select the dissertation at a later date.

  • To be eligible to register for the dissertation a student must submit a research proposal by 5:00 pm on the first Friday of the summer term. This proposed topic must be accepted by a dissertation supervisor and the module organiser, according to conditions set out in the module specifications for ECP305 (Dissertation). A student who does not submit an acceptable proposal will be allocated a dissertation topic chosen by the module organiser.

  • No more than three students will normally be allocated to any one supervisor.

  • A dissertation that is not written on the accepted topic cannot be submitted without the prior approval of both the module organiser and the dissertation supervisor.

    General Provisions

    The School of Business and Economics reserves the right to offer or withdraw any taught module.

    The School of Business and Economics may exercise its discretion in waiving prerequisites for its modules under exceptional circumstances. 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI. However for the Postgraduate Diploma: candidates must accumulate 105 credits plus marks of 40-49% in modules worth a total of at least 15 credits

5.2 Candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a taught module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s Special Assessment Period.

5.3  All examinations and tests must be taken at Loughborough University unless special permission is obtained in advance from the Programme Director.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Business Analysis and Management

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc /PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Business Analysis and Management
Programme code BSPT09
Length of programme The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twelve calendar months, for the award of PGDip is nine calendar months and for the award of PGCert is three calendar months.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/businessanalysisandmanagement/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • provide a broad, analytical and integrative study of business and management;
  • develop modelling, analysis and consultancy skills and expertise with a strong emphasis on quantitative and IT intensive techniques for handling complex business decision problems
  • attract well-qualified students with non-business/management first degrees from a broad mix of disciplines and backgrounds to facilitate a multi-perspective interactive learning process;
  • add value to first degrees by developing in individuals an integrated and critically aware understanding of management and organisations, and assist them to take effective roles within them;
  • produce high quality graduates with the ability to apply knowledge and understanding of business and management to complex issues, both systematically and creatively, to improve business and management practice;
  • prepare graduates for a valued career in a wide range of management situations and, in particular, careers as business analysts or business consultants, by developing relevant knowledge and skills;
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large business and commercial organisations and with taught content that allows students to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice;
  • develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community;
  • enhance the employability of our graduates in regard to either their first degree discipline or in a management role;
  • encourage in our students hard work, enthusiasm and self-motivation, a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and openness to new ideas;
  • enhance students’ lifelong learning skills and personal development so as to be able to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to business and society at large.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The QAA benchmark statement for Master’s awards in business and management
The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of:

  • the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
  • the external context in which organisations operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
  • how organisations are managed - including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the external context:
  • the numerical, analytical and computer based tools, techniques and approaches that are required for the thorough analysis and solution of complex decision problems in a business context, together with the advantages and disadvantages and necessary precautions in using them.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

 On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
  • interpret extensive and complex numerical information to assess and evaluate alternative course of action in business decision making;
  • formulate management decision problems in terms of appropriate models, identifying objectives, constraints and alternative options, and assess the validity of such formulations;
  • analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in business and management by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
  • collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current business or management situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques based and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
  • select and apply a range of sophisticated numerical and computer based techniques for analysing and resolving complex decision making problems in business situations;
  • interact effectively with other management professionals in assisting them to resolve planning problems;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
  • use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management in group work situations.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
  • be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
  • apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
  • solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
  • apply sophisticated numerical reasoning in solving problems;
  • scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
  • evaluate the merits of different software packages and acquire skills in new software packages quickly;
  • recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
  • use effective team-working skills including leadership, team-building and project management;
  • recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
  • use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.

4. Programme structure

4.1       Module Structure

            Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 150)  

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

BSP020

Human Resource Management

15

1

BSP021

Accounting and Financial Management

15

1

BSP022

Marketing Management

15

1

BSP023

Operations Management

15

1

BSP026

Information Systems and Management

15

2

BSP035

Operational Research Methods

15

2

BSP043

Business Forecasting

15

2

BSP039

Business Analysis & Planning

30

3

BSP028

Strategic Management

15

3

SEMESTER 2 OPTION MODULES

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose TWO modules (total modular weight 30) to be chosen from the list below. 

BUSINESS ANALYSIS AND MANAGEMENT

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

BSP024

Business Economics

15

2

BSP033

International Business Environment

15

2

BSP034

Enterprise, Employability & Personal Development

15

2

BSP038

Global Outsourcing & Offshoring of Services

15

2

BSP040

International Marketing

15

2

BSP041

Small Business & Entrepreneurship

15

2

BSP044

Services & Retail Management

15

2

BSP045

Work Psychology

15

2

BSP046

Enterprise Resource Planning

15

2

BSP047

Logistics & Supply Chain Management

15

2

*Option choices will require approval of the Director of Postgraduate Programmes (Business School).

4.1.1     For full details of when the modules are taught and the specific assessment procedures see Module Specifications. 

4.2 Guidance will be given to candidates concerning the selection of optional components.  However, the School reserves the right to offer or withdraw any optional module.

4.3 The School reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

5.2 In accordance with regulation XXI, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

5.3 In addition  students  may choose  to be reassessed in BSP028  Strategic Management and BSP039  Business  Analysis and Planning  in January  of the next academic year.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Management

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip/ PGCert
Programme title Management
Programme code BSPT10
Length of programme The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twelve calendar months, for the award of PGDip is nine calendar months and for the award of PGCert is three calendar months.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/management/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:                     

  • provide a broad, analytical and integrative study of business and management;
  • attract well-qualified students with non-business/management first degrees from a broad mix of disciplines and backgrounds to facilitate a multi-perspective interactive learning process;
  • add value to first degrees by developing in individuals an integrated and critically aware understanding of management and organisations, and assist them to take effective roles within them;
  • produce high quality graduates with the ability to apply knowledge and understanding of business and management to complex issues, both systematically and creatively, to improve business and management practice;
  • prepare graduates for a valued career in a wide range of management situations by developing relevant knowledge and skills;
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large business and commercial organisations and with taught content that allows students to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice;
  • develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community;
  • enhance the employability of our graduates in regard to either their first degree discipline or in a management role;
  • encourage in our students hard work, enthusiasm and self-motivation, a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and openness to new ideas;
  • enhance students’ lifelong learning skills and personal development so as to be able to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to business and society at large.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The QAA benchmark statement for Master’s awards in business and management

The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of:

  • the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
  • the external context in which organisations operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
  • how organisations are managed - including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the external context.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
  • analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in business and management by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
  • collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current business or management situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques based and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
  • use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management in group work situations.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
  • be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
  • apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
  • solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
  • scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
  • recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
  • use effective team-working skills including leadership, team-building and project management;
  • recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
  • use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Module Structure

       Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 135)

            

Code         

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

BSP020    

Human Resource Management

15

1

BSP021    

Accounting and Financial Management

15

1

BSP022    

Marketing Management

15

1

BSP023    

Operations Management

15

1

BSP025    

Business Analysis

15

2

BSP026

Information Systems and Management

15

2

BSP027

Management Analysis

30

3

BSP028

Strategic Management

15

3

 Semester Two Option Modules

In addition to the listed compulsory Modules, students will choose THREE Modules (total Module weight 45) to be chosen from the list below.

MANAGEMENT

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

BSP024

Business Economics

15

2

BSP032

International & Cross Cultural Management

15

2

BSP034

Enterprise, Employability & Personal Development

15

2

BSP038

Global Outsourcing & Offshoring of Services

15

2

BSP040

International Marketing

15

2

BSP041

Small Business & Entrepreneurship

15

2

BSP043

Business Forecasting

15

2

BSP044

Services & Retail Management

15

2

BSP045

Work Psychology

15

2

BSP046

Enterprise Resource Planning

15

2

BSP047

Logistics & Supply Chain Management

15

2

BSP067

Advertising & Consumer Behaviour

15

2

*Option choices will require approval of the Director of Postgraduate Programmes (Business School).

4.1.1 For full details of when the modules are taught and the specific assessment procedures see Module Specifications. 

4.2 Guidance will be given to candidates concerning the selection of optional components.  However, the School reserves the right to offer or withdraw any optional module. 

4.3 The School reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

5.2 In accordance with regulation XXI, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period. 

5.3 In addition  students  may choose  to be reassessed in BSP028  Strategic Management and BSP027  Management Analysis  in January of the next academic year.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc International Management

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip/ PGCert
Programme title International Management
Programme code BSPT11
Length of programme The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twelve calendar months, for the award of PGDip is nine calendar months and for the award of PGCert is three calendar months.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/internationalmanagement/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • provide a broad, analytical and integrative study of business and international management;
  • attract well-qualified students with non-business/management first degrees from a broad mix of disciplines and backgrounds to facilitate a multi-perspective interactive learning process;
  • add value to first degrees by developing in individuals an integrated and critically aware understanding of management and organisations, and assist them to take effective roles within them;
  • produce high quality graduates with the ability to apply knowledge and understanding of business and management to complex issues, both systematically and creatively, to improve business and management practice;
  • prepare graduates for a valued career in a wide range of management situations including those requiring cultural competence by developing relevant knowledge and skills;
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large business and commercial organisations and with taught content that allows students to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice;
  • develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community;
  • enhance the employability of our graduates in regard to either their first degree discipline or in a management role;
  • encourage in our students hard work, enthusiasm and self-motivation, a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and openness to new ideas;
  • enhance students’ lifelong learning skills and personal development so as to be able to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to business and society at large.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The QAA benchmark statement for Master’s awards in business and management
The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of:

  • the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations (especially international ones) - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
  • the external context in which organisations (especially international ones) operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
  • how organisations (especially international ones) are managed - including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the external context.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
  • analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in business and international management by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
  • collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current business or management situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques based and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
  • use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management in group work situations.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
  • be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
  • apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
  • solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
  • scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
  • recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
  • use effective team-working skills including leadership, team-building and project management;
  • recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
  • use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.

4. Programme structure

1 Module Structure

       Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 150)

 

Code          

Subject Title

Modular

Weight

Semester

BSP020

Human Resource Management

15

1

BSP021

Accounting and Financial Management

15

1

BSP022

Marketing Management

15

1

BSP023

Operations Management

15

1

BSP025

Business Analysis

15

2

BSP032

International and Cross Cultural Management

15

2

BSP033

International Business Environment

15

2

BSP031

International Management Analysis

30

3

BSP028

Strategic Management

15

3

Semester 2 Option Modules.

In addition to the listed complusory modules, students will choose TWO modules (total modular weight 30) to be chosen from the list below.

INTERNATIONAL MANAGEMENT

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

BSP034

Enterprise, Employability & Personal Development

15

2

BSP038

Global Outsourcing & Offshoring of Services

15

2

BSP040

International Marketing

15

2

BSP041

Small Business & Entrepreneurship

15

2

BSP044

Services & Retail Management

15

2

BSP045

Work Psychology

15

2

BSP046

Enterprise Resource Planning

15

2

BSP047

Logistics & Supply Chain Management

15

2

BSP067

Advertising & Consumer Behaviour

15

2

 *Option choices will require approval of the Director of Postgraduate Programmes (Business School).

4.1.1 For full details of when the modules are taught and the specific assessment procedures see Module Specifications.

4.2 Guidance will be given to candidates concerning the selection of optional components.  However, the School reserves the right to offer or withdraw any optional module.

4.3 The School reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

5.2 In accordance with regulation XXI, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

5.3 In addition  students  may choose  to be reassessed in BSP028  Strategic Management and BSP031  International Management Analysis in January  of the next academic year.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Finance and Management

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Finance and Management
Programme code BSPT12
Length of programme The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twelve calendar months, for the award of PGDip is nine calendar months and for the award of PGCert is three calendar months.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/financeandmanagement/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • provide a broad, analytical and integrative study of business, finance and management;
  • attract well-qualified students with non-business/management/finance first degrees from a broad mix of disciplines and backgrounds to facilitate a multi-perspective interactive learning process;
  • add value to first degrees by developing in individuals an integrated and critically aware understanding of management, finance and organisations, and assist them to take effective roles within them;
  • produce high quality graduates with the ability to apply knowledge and understanding of business, finance and management to complex issues, both systematically and creatively, to improve business and management practice;
  • prepare graduates for a valued career in a wide range of management situations by developing relevant knowledge and skills;
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large business and commercial organisations and with taught content that allows students to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice;
  • develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community;
  • enhance the employability of our graduates in regard to either their first degree discipline or in a management role;
  • encourage in our students hard work, enthusiasm and self-motivation, a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and openness to new ideas;
  • enhance students’ lifelong learning skills and personal development so as to be able to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to business and society at large.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The QAA benchmark statement for Master’s awards in business and management

The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of: 

  • the internal aspects, functions, processes and financing of organisations - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
  • the external context in which organisations operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
  • how organisations are managed and financially controlled - including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the external context.
  • how financial markets operate for different financial products in different market and regulatory settings

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business and finance disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
  • analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in business, management and finance by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
  • collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current business, management or finance situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques based and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business and finance context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business and finance related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
  • use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management in group work situations.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
  • be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
  • apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
  • solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
  • scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
  • recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
  • use effective team-working skills including leadership, team-building and project management;
  • recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
  • use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.

4. Programme structure

4.1        Module Structure

             Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 165)

Code         

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

BSP051

Introduction to Human Resource Management

15

1

BSP054

Accounting and Performance Measurement

15

1

BSP022

Marketing Management

15

1

BSP050

Foundations of Corporate Finance

15

1

BSP025

Business Analysis

15

2

BSP052

Financial Theory and Corporate Policy

15

2

BSP053

Corporate and Wholesale Finance

15

2

BSP060

International Financial Management

15

2

BSP055

Financial Derivatives

15

3

BSP056

Current Issues in Finance

15

3

BSP028

Strategic Management

15

3

Semester 2 Option Modules.

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose ONE Module, (total modular weight 15) to be chosen from the list below. 

FINANCE AND MANAGEMENT

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

BSP024

Business Economics

15

2

BSP032

International & Cross Cultural Management

 15

BSP033

International Business Environment

15

2

BSP034

Enterprise, Employability & Personal Development

15

2

BSP041

Small Business & Entrepreneurship

15

2

BSP043

Business Forecasting

 

 

BSP044

Services & Retail Management

15

2

BSP046

Enterprise Resource Planning

15

2

BSP047

Logistics & Supply Chain Management

15

2

*Option choices will require approval of the Director of Postgraduate Programmes (Business School).

4.1.1 For full details of when the modules are taught and the specific assessment procedures see Module Specifications. 

4.2 Guidance will be given to candidates concerning the selection of optional components.  However, the School reserves the right to offer or withdraw any optional module. 

4.3  The School reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

5.2 In accordance with regulation XXI, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

5.3 In addition  students  may choose  to be reassessed in BSP028  Strategic Management, BSP055  Financial  Derivatives  and BSP056  Current  Issues in Finance in January  of the next academic year.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Marketing and Management

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Marketing and Management
Programme code BSPT13
Length of programme The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twelve calendar months, for the award of PGDip is nine calendar months and for the award of PGCert is three calendar months.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/marketingandmanagement/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • provide a broad, analytical and integrative study of business, management and marketing;
  • attract well-qualified students with non-business/management/marketing first degrees from a broad mix of disciplines and backgrounds to facilitate a multi-perspective interactive learning process;
  • add value to first degrees by developing in individuals an integrated and critically aware understanding of management, marketing and organisations, and assist them to take effective roles within them;
  • produce high quality graduates with the ability to apply knowledge and understanding of business, marketing and management to complex issues, both systematically and creatively, to improve business and management practice;
  • prepare graduates for a valued career in a wide range of management situations by developing relevant knowledge and skills;
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large business and commercial organisations and with taught content that allows students to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice;
  • develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community;
  • enhance the employability of our graduates in regard to either their first degree discipline or in a management role;
  • encourage in our students hard work, enthusiasm and self-motivation, a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and openness to new ideas;
  • enhance students’ lifelong learning skills and personal development so as to be able to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to business and society at large. 

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

QAA Master’s awards in business and management

The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of:

  • the internal aspects, functions, processes and of organisations - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
  • the external context in which organisations operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
  • how organisations are managed - including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the external context.
  • The concepts, methods, processes, management and institutions involved in marketing goods and services

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
  • analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in business, marketing and management by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
  • collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current business, management or marketing situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques based and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business and marketing context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business, marketing and management related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
  • use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management in group work situations.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
  • be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
  • apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
  • solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
  • scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
  • recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
  • use effective team-working skills including leadership, team-building and project management;
  • recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
  • use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Module Structure

Compulsory Modules  (total modular weight 150)

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

BSP020

Human Resource Management

15

1

BSP021

Accounting and Financial Management

15

1

BSP022

Marketing Management

15

1

BSP025

Business Analysis

15

2

BSP028

Strategic Management

15

3

BSP040

International Marketing

15

2

BSP065

Market Research Methods

15

1

BSP066

Marketing Strategy and Planning

15

2

BSP069

Marketing Analysis

30

3

Semester 2 Optional Modules

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose TWO Modules (total modular weight 30) to be chosen from the list below.

MARKETING & MANAGEMENT

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

BSP024

Business Economics

15

2

BSP032

International & Cross Cultural Management

15

2

BSP033

International Business Environment

15

2

BSP034

Enterprise, Employability & Personal Development

15

2

BSP041

Small Business & Entrepreneurship

15

2

BSP044

Services & Retail Management

15

2

BSP045

Work Psychology

15

2

BSP046

Enterprise Resource Planning

15

2

BSP047

Logistics & Supply Chain Management

15

2

BSP067

Advertising & Consumer Behaviour

15

2

*Option choices will require approval of the Director of Postgraduate Programmes (Business School). 

4.1.1     For full details of when the modules are taught and the specific assessment procedures see Module Specifications. 

4.2 Guidance will be given to candidates concerning the selection of optional components.  However, the School reserves the right to offer or withdraw any optional module. 

4.3  The School reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

5.2 In accordance with regulation XXI, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

5.3 In addition  students  may choose  to be reassessed in BSP028  Strategic Management and BSP069  Marketing  Analysis  in January  of the next academic year.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Automotive Retail Management (2014 + 2015 entry)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
  • Institute of the Motor Industry
  • Chartered Management Institute
Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Automotive Retail Management
Programme code BSPT32
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of the MSc is thirty six calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of the Postgraduate Diploma and Postgraduate Certificate is twenty four calendar months and twelve calendar months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See:http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/automotiveretailmanagement/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in the automotive retail sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • prepare participants for automotive retail management roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
  • provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
  • enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
  • enhance students’ career development in the automotive sector
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with the automotive industry.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management (MB&M)
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
  • Professional Accreditation by the Institute of the Motor Industry 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:

K1. The impact of environmental forces on automotive sector organisations including ethical, economic, political, social and technological change issues;

K2. The development and operation of the sector specific markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;

K3. The concepts and processes in the production and marketing of automotive goods and services, and the management of resources and operations;

K4. The financing of the automotive dealer network involving the sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;

K5. The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;

K6. The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on dealership operations;

K7. The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;

K8. The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context of the automotive sector to meet stakeholder interests;

K9. The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment;

K10. The roles, responsibilities and requirements of different activities across the multifunctional areas of automotive dealerships;

K11. The role of digital and social media within the context of the retail automotive environment;

K12. The development of resilient and sustainable organisations within the retail automotive sector;

K13. The potential future development of the automotive industry and the role of retailing within it ;

K14. The international context in which the retail automotive sector operates;

K15. The issues of managing in a multi-cultural environment ;

K16. The knowledge of how sales and marketing activity needs to embrace international cultures.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

C1. Manage self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;

C2. Establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;

C3. Use of models of business situations and research skills;

C4. Identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;

C5. Recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;

C6. Conduct research into business and management issues;

C7. Learn through reflection on practice and experience;

C8. View the organisation from the perspective of sustainability and resilience;

C9. Recognise the management implications of different international cultures;

C10. Recognise the nuances of managing in an international context.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

P1. Apply leadership and performance management selecting the appropriate style for situations;

P2. Perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;

P3. Use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;

P4. Engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;

P5. Create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;

P6. Make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;

P7. Employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;

P8. Conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research;

P9. Use Social and Digital Media within the context of the retail automotive sector.

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

T1. Create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;

T2. Organise data and extract meaning from information and share knowledge;

T3. Use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;

T4. Listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;

T5. Use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;

T6. Demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;

T7. Set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;

T8. Interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;

T9. Manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations, and manage continued learning;

T10. Demonstrate the ability to operate appropriately in an international context.

4. Programme structure

4.1                  Compulsory Subjects  (total modular weight 60)

                                                                                                                                     Mmodule Weight

           

BSPP09/BSPN50 

Introduction to Business Planning

 

10

BSPP29/BSPN51

Generating Customer Loyalty

 

 10

BSPP35/BSPN52

Operations Management

 

10

BSPP91/BSPN53

Foundations of Management 

 

10

BSPP92/BSPN54

Finance for Managers

 

      10      

BSPP93/BSPN55

Decision Systems

 

  10   

 

4.2                  Optional Subjects   (total modular weight 60)

 

 BSPP05/BSPN56

 Managing Business Performance

10 

 BSPP21/BSPN57

 Managing Quality

10 

 BSPP36/BSPN65

 Management and Leadership Skills

10 

 BSPP85/BSPN58

 Improving Performance Through Coaching

10 

 BSPP90/BSPN59

 Change Management

10 

 BSPP94/BSPN63

 Human Resource Management

 

10

 BSPP95/BSPN60 

 Marketing Strategy

10 

 BSPP96/BSPN61

 Digital and Social Media in the Retail Car Market

10 

 BSPP97/BSPN62

 Cross Cultural Market Development

10 

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   

4.3                 MSc Subjects (total modular weight 60)

 

BSP732/BSPN03

Strategic Dealership Management

 

15

BSP746/BSPN04

Retail Marketing Strategy

 

15

BSP738/BSPN09

Managing Enterprise and Innovation

 

15 

BSP739/BSPN10

Cross Cultural and International Management

 

15 

BSP745†/BSPN12† 

Project

 

30

  by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)

 To complete the PGCert in Automotive Retail Management students must complete 6 x 10 credit modules. To complete the PGDip in Automotive Retail Management students must complete 12 x 10 credit modules, 6 of which should be chosen from those offered in Section 4.2. To complete the MSc in Automotive Retail Management students must complete 12 x 10 credit modules and 60 credits from those offered in Section 4.3 to include BSP745/BSPN12 30 credit Project. Section 5 outlines the specific modules required for each degree award.

4.4   For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1 To be eligible for the award of the Postgraduate Certificate in Automotive Retail Management, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits, from the modules listed in 4.1

At the discretion of the Programme Director candidates for the Certificate may substitute for the modules listed in 4.1 with any similar modules with an equivalent or greater weight from the School of Business and Economics suite of postgraduate modules.

5.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma in Automotive Retail Management candidates must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 120 from the modules listed in 4.1 and 4.2.

5.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc in Automotive Retail Management candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.2 and in addition must complete 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.3.    Candidates who have completed BSPP96 cannot undertake BSP739.

 

Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS PGCert Automotive Retail Management (Singapore)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
  • Institute of the Motor Industry
  • Chartered Management Institute
Final award PG Cert
Programme title Automotive Retail Management (Singapore)
Programme code BSPT34
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum and maximum periods of study for the awards covered by these regulations are specified in Regulation XXI.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

Employment in an appropriate dealership middle management position, as determined by the Programme Director.

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in the automotive retail sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • prepare participants for automotive retail management roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisation;
  • provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
  • enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
  • enhance students’ career development in the automotive sector
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with the automotive industry.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management (MB&M)
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
  • Professional Accreditation by the Institute of the Motor Industry 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:

  • The impact of environmental forces on automotive sector organisations including ethical, economic, political, social and technological change issues;
  • The development and operation of the sector specific markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
  • The concepts and processes in the production and marketing of automotive goods and services, and the management of resources and operations;
  • The financing of the automotive dealer network involving the sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
  • The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;
  • The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on dealership operations;
  • The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;
  • The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context of the automotive sector to meet stakeholder interests;
  • The roles, responsibilities and requirements of different activities across the multifunctional areas of automotive dealerships.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • manage self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
  • establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
  • use of models of business situations;
  • recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
  • conduct research into business and management issues as part of work based assignments;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
  • engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
  • employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills as part of work based assignments.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • organise data and extract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
  • listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
  • use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
  • demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
  • interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
  • manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations, and manage continued learning.

4. Programme structure

 

4.1 Compulsory Subjects  (total modular weight 60)

                                                                                                                                Module Weight

BSPP02

An Introduction to Automotive Retail Management

 

10

BSPP05/BSPN56

Managing Business Performance

 

10

BSPP09/BSPN50

An Introduction to Business Planning

 

10

BSPP29/BSPN51 

Generating Customer Loyalty

 

10

BSPP70

Analysing and Budgeting for Your Business

 

10

BSP691

Operations Management for the Automotive Retail Business

 

10

 

4.2     For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI and must have accumulated 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.1.

5.2 Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XXI for candidates who have the right of re-examination to be reassessed in the University’s Special Assessment Period where modules allow.

 

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Healthcare Governance (Sept 2009 to Aug 2013)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip/ PGCert
Programme title Healthcare Governance
Programme code BSPT56
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty-six calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twelve and eighteen calendar months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

Entrance Requirements to the programme are: 

i)   possession of a degree or equivalent

or

ii)   possession of the academic requirements for corporate membership of

a British Chartered professional institution;

or

iii)   hold any other relevant qualification or professional experience as determined by the Programme Director together with a reasonable level of formal academic education.

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

This multi-disciplinary Postgraduate Programme in Healthcare Governance is aimed at professional healthcare managers, those wishing to move from another field within healthcare and those working in specialist management areas wishing to broaden their expertise.

The programme is delivered as a series of short courses for part-time study and aims to:

  • Provide a current view of governance in healthcare encompassing both organisational issues and specialist areas. It particularly focuses on the integration of governance into strategic and operational planning for the provision of a high quality health service;
  • Develop participants knowledge, increase job competencies and develop professional potential; and
  • Suit the needs of working professionals who do not have an opportunity for full-time study.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The Programme conforms to the benchmarks published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education in respect of Masters awards in business and management in 2002. Specifically the programme meets the requirements of a specialist programme for career development in that it is intended to prepare health professionals for a specialist career pathway.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

  • The framework of governance in healthcare will be taught by means of short lectures, group work and discussion with examples of systems and structures being given by the lecturers.
  • Tools and techniques used in healthcare governance will be taught by means of lectures, case studies and syndicate exercises.
  • Governance principles and practice relevant to the healthcare sector will be taught by means of case study analysis, lectures and group work.  The emphasis in this element will be upon enabling the students to develop critical thinking in respect of the application of general principles to particular situations.
  • Systems and healthcare governance will be taught by means of lecture and case study review. An overview of systems theory in healthcare will form an integral part of the teaching of this element.
  • Research methodology will be taught by means of lectures, group work and syndicate discussions. The essentially individual nature of research undertaken by students will necessitate the support of much of the formal teaching by guided study and reading and individual work within the tutorial sessions.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Identify methods for establishing an effective and integrated governance system. This will be taught by means of lectures and group work including the analysis of case study materials and presentation of results
  • Assess a range of risk assessment tools and select the most appropriate for use in given situations will be taught by means of short lectures and analysis of case study materials.
  • Critically analyse healthcare governance issues and present possible intervention strategies will be taught by means of short lectures, cases study analysis group work and syndicate exercises.
  • Evaluate the effectiveness of any interventions this will be taught by means of lectures and short presentations, case study analysis and group work. The emphasis will be upon the development of a critical facility that will enable the selection of the most appropriate criteria for intervention evaluation.
  • Guided reading and encouragement to use on-line data sources will also serve to enhance the attainment of all of these intended learning outcomes.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Produce governance and related policies for their organization will be taught by means of lectures and guided discussions, group work and short presentations
  • Use a range of risk assessment tools and carry out risk assessments within their own organization this will be taught by means of lecture, case study analysis and other group work.
  • Devise and maintain systems for the collection of data on untoward incidents will be taught by means of lectures and case study review. Students will be encouraged to examine and evaluate the data collection systems within their own organization. This will be reinforced and supported within the tutorial sessions
  • Develop effective risk control strategies for healthcare will be taught by means of group work and discussion, short lectures and case study evaluation. Emphasis will be placed upon the development of systems that are both robust and cost-effective.
  • Design a research tool appropriate to healthcare governance management will be taught by means of lectures, group work and guided reading. This will be supported by individual guided study facilitated by means of the tutorial sessions.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Establish management systems will be taught by means of lectures, group work and discussion and case study analysis. Guided reading will reinforce learning
  • Communicate with a range of stakeholders will be taught by means of case study analysis and discussion , group work (including videoed group work), role play and short lectures.
  • Motivate others to take action will be taught by means of lectures, case study analysis, group discussions and role play
  • Present technical and complex concepts in a form which is understandable to managers will be taught by means of case study review, group work, role play and short lectures.
  • Use information and communications technology appropriately in acquiring analyzing and communicating information will be taught by means of demonstrations, short lectures, group work and guided reading. Students will be encouraged further to access on-line data sources
  • Develop research skills, including data collection and analysis will be taught by means of lectures, group work, case study analysis and guided reading. This will be enhanced and reinforced through tutorials

4. Programme structure

4.1       Modules

           

 

Modular Weight

BSP671

Clinical Governance

20

 

BSP672

Corporate Governance in Healthcare

20

 

BSP673

Performance and Strategic Healthcare Management

20

 

BSP674

Governance, Leadership and Management in Healthcare

20

 

BSP675

Managing Healthcare Risk

20

 

BSP676

Research Methods in the Business of Healthcare

20

 

BSP677*

Masters Project

60

* by distance learning

 

4.2 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate candidates must have accumulated 60 credits.  Specifically, candidates must complete BSP671, BSP672 and BSP674. 

5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma candidates must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 120.  Specifically, candidates must have completed BSP671 to BSP676.

Candidates, who having completed the full Certificate programme elect to transfer to the Diploma programme, will be required to complete a further 60 credits.  Specifically, candidates must have completed BSP674 to BSP676.

Candidates must also have accumulated at least 100 credits and achieved module marks of not less than 40% in further modules with a total module weight of 20.

5.1.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc candidates must have satisfied all of the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition must have achieved 60 credits from BSP677, the Masters Project. 

5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Healthcare Governance (pre-Sept 2009 entry)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip/ PGCert
Programme title Healthcare Governance
Programme code BSPT56
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty-six calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twelve and eighteen calendar months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

Entrance Requirements to the programme are:

i)              possession of a degree or equivalent

or

ii)         possession of the academic requirements for corporate membership of

a British Chartered professional institution;

or

iii)         hold any other relevant qualification and experience approved by the University.

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

This multi-disciplinary Postgraduate Programme in Healthcare Governance is aimed at professional healthcare managers, those wishing to move from another field within healthcare and those working in specialist management areas wishing to broaden their expertise.

The programme is delivered as a series of short courses for part-time study and aims to:

  • Provide a current view of governance in healthcare encompassing both organisational issues and specialist areas. It particularly focuses on the integration of governance into strategic and operational planning for the provision of a high quality health service;
  • Develop participants knowledge, increase job competencies and develop professional potential; and
  • Suit the needs of working professionals who do not have an opportunity for full-time study.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The Programme conforms to the benchmarks published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education in respect of Masters awards in business and management in 2002. Specifically the programme meets the requirements of a specialist programme for career development in that it is intended to prepare health professionals for a specialist career pathway.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

  • The framework of governance in healthcare will be taught by means of short lectures, group work and discussion with examples of systems and structures being given by the lecturers.
  • Tools and techniques used in healthcare governance will be taught by means of lectures, case studies and syndicate exercises.
  • Governance principles and practice relevant to the healthcare sector will be taught by means of case study analysis, lectures and group work.  The emphasis in this element will be upon enabling the students to develop critical thinking in respect of the application of general principles to particular situations.
  • Systems and healthcare governance will be taught by means of lecture and case study review. An overview of systems theory in healthcare will form an integral part of the teaching of this element.
  • Research methodology will be taught by means of lectures, group work and syndicate discussions. The essentially individual nature of research undertaken by students will necessitate the support of much of the formal teaching by guided study and reading and individual work within the tutorial sessions.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Identify methods for establishing an effective and integrated governance system. This will be taught by means of lectures and group work including the analysis of case study materials and presentation of results
  • Assess a range of risk assessment tools and select the most appropriate for use in given situations will be taught by means of short lectures and analysis of case study materials.
  • Critically analyse healthcare governance issues and present possible intervention strategies will be taught by means of short lectures, cases study analysis group work and syndicate exercises.
  • Evaluate the effectiveness of any interventions this will be taught by means of lectures and short presentations, case study analysis and group work. The emphasis will be upon the development of a critical facility that will enable the selection of the most appropriate criteria for intervention evaluation.
  • Guided reading and encouragement to use on-line data sources will also serve to enhance the attainment of all of these intended learning outcomes.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Produce governance and related policies for their organization will be taught by means of lectures and guided discussions, group work and short presentations
  • Use a range of risk assessment tools and carry out risk assessments within their own organization this will be taught by means of lecture, case study analysis and other group work.
  • Devise and maintain systems for the collection of data on untoward incidents will be taught by means of lectures and case study review. Students will be encouraged to examine and evaluate the data collection systems within their own organization. This will be reinforced and supported within the tutorial sessions
  • Develop effective risk control strategies for healthcare will be taught by means of group work and discussion, short lectures and case study evaluation. Emphasis will be placed upon the development of systems that are both robust and cost-effective.
  • Design a research tool appropriate to healthcare governance management will be taught by means of lectures, group work and guided reading. This will be supported by individual guided study facilitated by means of the tutorial sessions.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Establish management systems will be taught by means of lectures, group work and discussion and case study analysis. Guided reading will reinforce learning
  • Communicate with a range of stakeholders will be taught by means of case study analysis and discussion , group work (including videoed group work), role play and short lectures.
  • Motivate others to take action will be taught by means of lectures, case study analysis, group discussions and role play
  • Present technical and complex concepts in a form which is understandable to managers will be taught by means of case study review, group work, role play and short lectures.
  • Use information and communications technology appropriately in acquiring analyzing and communicating information will be taught by means of demonstrations, short lectures, group work and guided reading. Students will be encouraged further to access on-line data sources
  • Develop research skills, including data collection and analysis will be taught by means of lectures, group work, case study analysis and guided reading. This will be enhanced and reinforced through tutorials

4. Programme structure

4.1   Modules

           

 

Modular Weight

BSP671

Clinical Governance

20

 

BSP672

Corporate Governance in Healthcare

20

 

BSP673

Managing Healthcare Performance

20

 

BSP674

Systems of Healthcare Governance

20

 

BSP675

Healthcare Risk Management

20

 

BSP676

Research Methods in the Business of Healthcare

20

 

BSP677*

Masters Project

60

 

 

 

 

* by distance learning

 

4.2  For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate candidates must have accumulated 60 credits.  Specifically, candidates must complete BSP671 to BSP673. 

5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma candidates must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 120.  Specifically, candidates must have completed BSP671 to BSP676.

Candidates, who having completed the full Certificate programme elect to transfer to the Diploma programme, will be required to complete a further 60 credits.  Specifically, candidates must have completed BSP674 to BSP676.

Candidates must also have accumulated at least 100 credits and achieved module marks of not less than 40% in further modules with a total module weight of 20.

5.1.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc candidates must have satisfied all of the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition must have achieved 60 credits from BSP677, the Masters Project. 

 

5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Management and Leadership (Alliance Boots)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Management and Leadership
Programme code BSPT63
Length of programme The programme is available on a part-time basis. The duration of the Postgraduate Diploma is 18 months. The duration of the MSc is 36 months.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

Entrance Requirements to the programme are: 

Either

i)          possession of a degree or equivalent.

Or

ii)             possession of at least three years’ administrative/managerial experience, and normally with employment in an appropriate administrative position, as determined by the Programme Director.

 

Candidates who are members of the following approved accountancy bodies may, at the discretion of the Programme Director, count 20 credits towards the Diploma / MSc in Management and Leadership. 

 

  • Association of Chartered Certified Accountants (ACCA)
  • Chartered Institute of Management Accounts (CIMA)
  • Chartered Institute of Public Finance and Accounting (CIPFA)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales (ICAEW)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland (ICAS)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants of Ireland (ICAI)
Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in their chosen industry sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • prepare participants for management roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisation;
  • provide participants with the opportunity to foster participants understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
  • enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
  • enhance the career development and employability of participants;
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

The specific learning outcomes for the programme are detailed below:

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas: 

  •  The impact of contextual forces on organisations including ethical, economic, environmental, social and technological change issues;
  • The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
  • The concepts, processes and institutions in the production and marketing of goods and / or services; the management of resources and operations;
  •  The financing of the business enterprise:  sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
  •  The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;
  • The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;
  • The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;
  •  The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context to meet stakeholder interests;
  • A range of contemporary issues impacting on various areas of management;
  • The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  •  manage creative processes in self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
  • establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
  • identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;
  • recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  •  apply leadership and performance management selecting the appropriate style for situations;
  •  engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
  •  create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  •  make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
  •  employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
  •  conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet as well as primary research;
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • scan and organise data; abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
  • listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
  • use effective oral and written communication using a range of media including business reports;
  • demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
  • interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
  • manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;
  • enhance their career prospects and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisation.

4. Programme structure

 

Code

Module title

Modular weight

BSP776

Leading People to Influence Performance

10

BSP777

Introduction to Information Management

10

BSP778

Introduction to Financial Management

10

BSP779

Planning

10

BSP780

Marketing

10

BSP781

Problem Solving and Decision Making

10

BSP782

Leading the Team

10

BSP783

Information Management

10

BSP784

Financial Management

10

BSP785

Operations

10

BSP786

Strategic Marketing Management

10

BSP787

New Product and Service Development

10

BSP763

Masters Project

60

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

5.2 Candidates who successfully fulfil the requirements for the award of Postgraduate Diploma as specified in Regulation XXI may elect to progress to the MSc by registering for BSP763.

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Management and Leadership (Higher Education Administration) (Sept 2011 - 2015 entry)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip/ PGCert
Programme title Management and Leadership
Programme code BSPT66
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Diploma is eighteen calendar months.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/managementleadershiphighereducationadministration/

and also:

Entrance Requirements to the Postgraduate Diploma are:

Either

i)          possession of a degree or equivalent.

Or

ii)             possession of at least three years’ administrative/managerial experience, and normally with employment in an appropriate administrative position, as determined by the Programme Director.

Or

iii)         possession of the Loughborough University Postgraduate Certificate in Management.

 

See also Exemptions below in 'Programme Structure'

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in their chosen sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • prepare participants for management and administrative roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
  • provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
  • enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
  • enhance the career development and employability of participants;
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with Higher Education Institutions.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

The programme is delivered through a combination of short lectures, individual and group exercises, workshops, role-play and practical sessions.   The modules are highly participative encouraging students to contribute to class discussions and to share personal experiences and concerns with fellow students.  Students are also encouraged to consider situations within their own work environments.

The Programme Director acts in the capacity of a personal tutor and provides students with advice and guidance on academic progress and study problems. Students are required to work both individually and within groups for both study and assessment. A programme handbook is available to each student at the beginning of the programme.  The handbook sets out general advice on study, key regulations on assessment, programme regulations and module specifications for all modules available for study.  At each module, further information is provided including a module outline which details the lecture schedule and associated reading guidance.

Constructive criticism is provided to students on coursework assignments throughout the programme. 

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:

  • The impact of contextual forces on Higher Education Institutions including ethical, economic, environmental, social and technological change issues;
  • The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
  • The concepts, processes and institutions in the production and marketing of goods and / or services; the management of resources and operations;
  • The financing of the Higher Education Institutions:  sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
  • The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;
  • The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;
  • The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;
  • The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context to meet stakeholder interests;
  • A range of contemporary issues impacting on various areas of management;
  • The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • manage creative processes in self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
  • establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
  • use models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
  • identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;
  • explore quality issues pertaining to higher education;
  • recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
  • conduct research into higher education management issues;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • apply leadership and performance management selecting the appropriate style for situations;
  • perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
  • engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
  • implement recruitment and select processes successfully;
  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
  • employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research;
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • scan and organise data and abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
  • listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
  • use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
  • demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
  • interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
  • manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;
  • enhance their career prospects and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisations.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Compulsory Subjects (total modular weight 120)

                       

 

Module Weight

BSP856

Financial Management 2

20

 

BSP861

Planning and Operations 2

20

 

BSP866

Human Resource Management 2

15

 

BSP871

Information Management 2

20

 

BSP876

Leading Administrative Issues: Higher Education Environment 2

 

20

BSP877

Personnel Management 2: Policy and Procedural Issues

15

BSP761*

Research Project Proposal

10

 

4.2  MSc Subjects

BSP763

Masters Project

60

  by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)

 

4.3 The choice of optional subjects will be made from those available.  Information on the  up-to-date position is available form the School of Business and Economics. 

4.4 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

 

4.5 Exemptions

Candidates who were awarded the Loughborough University Professional Diploma in Management prior to 2001 may count 100 credits towards the award of an MSc.

Candidates who were awarded the Loughborough University Professional Diploma in Management after 2001 may count 120 credits towards the award of an MSc.

Candidates who have been awarded the Association of University Administrators Postgraduate Certificate in Professional Practice awarded by the Open University may count up to 40 credits towards the LoughboroughUniversity Postgraduate Diploma in Management and Leadership at the discretion of the Programme Director.

Candidates who have been awarded any of the following awards may, at the discretion of the Programme Director, be exempt from one or two modules of the Postgraduate Diploma in Management and Leadership (HEA): 

  • Postgraduate Certificate in Educational Leadership and Management (Nottingham University)
  • Postgraduate Certificate in Educational Leadership and Management (Birmingham City University)
  • Postgraduate Certificate of Special Study in Supporting Learning (University of Westminster)
  • Postgraduate Certificate in Management and Leadership (Sheffield Hallam University)
  • Postgraduate Certificate in Higher Education Management (Bath University)
  • Postgraduate Certificate in Higher Education Management (Southampton University)
  • ILM Level 5 Certificate in Management delivered by a Higher Education Staff Development department. 

Candidates who are members of the Chartered Institute of Public Finance and Accouting (CIPFA) may, at the discretion of the Programme Director, count 20 credits towards the Diploma.

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1.1  To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.1.

5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates have accumulated at least 100 credits and achieved module marks of not less than 40% in further modules with a total module weight of 20 from the modules listed in 4.1.

5.1.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc candidates must have satisified all the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition must have achieved 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.2. 

 5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Management and Leadership (Higher Education Administration) (Sept 2008 to Aug 2011 entry)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Management and Leadership
Programme code BSPT66
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Diploma is eighteen calendar months.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

Entrance Requirements to the Postgraduate Diploma are:

Either

i)          possession of a degree or equivalent.

Or

ii)             possession of at least three years’ administrative/managerial experience, and normally with employment in an appropriate administrative position, as determined by the Programme Director.

Or

iii)         possession of the Loughborough University Postgraduate Certificate in Management.

 

See also Exemptions under Programme Structure below.

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in their chosen sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • prepare participants for management and administrative roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
  • provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
  • enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
  • enhance the career development and employability of participants;
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with Higher Education Institutions.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:

  • The impact of contextual forces on Higher Education Institutions including ethical, economic, environmental, social and technological change issues;
  • The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
  • The concepts, processes and institutions in the production and marketing of goods and / or services; the management of resources and operations;
  • The financing of the Higher Education Institutions:  sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
  • The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;
  • The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;
  • The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;
  • The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context to meet stakeholder interests;
  • A range of contemporary issues impacting on various areas of management;
  • The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • manage creative processes in self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
  • establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
  • use models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
  • identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;
  • explore quality issues pertaining to higher education;
  • recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
  • conduct research into higher education management issues;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • apply leadership and performance management selecting the appropriate style for situations;
  • perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
  • engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
  • implement recruitment and select processes successfully;
  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
  • employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research;
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • scan and organise data and abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
  • listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
  • use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
  • demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
  • interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
  • manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;
  • enhance their career prospects and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisations.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Compulsory Subjects (total modular weight 120)

                                                                                                                    Module Weight

BSP856

Financial Management 2

20

 

BSP861

Planning and Operations 2

20

 

BSP866

Human Resource Management 2

15

 

BSP871

Information Management 2

20

 

BSP876

Leading Administrative Issues: Higher Education Environment 2

 

20

BSP877

Personnel Management 2: Policy and Procedural Issues

15

BSP761*

Research Project Proposal

10

 

4.2  MSc Subjects

BSP763

Masters Project

60

  by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)

 

4.3 The choice of optional subjects will be made from those available.  Information on the  up-to-date position is available from the School of Business and Economics. 

4.4 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

 

4.5 Exemptions 

Candidates who were awarded the Loughborough University Professional Diploma in Management prior to 2001 may count 100 credits towards the award of an MSc.

Candidates who were awarded the Loughborough University Professional Diploma in Management after 2001 may count 120 credits towards the award of an MSc.

Candidates who have been awarded the Association of University Administrators Postgraduate Certificate in Professional Practice awarded by the Open University may count 25 credits towards the LoughboroughUniversity Postgraduate Diploma in Management and Leadership at the discretion of the Programme Director.

Candidates who are members of the Chartered Institute of Public Finance and Accouting (CIPFA) may, at the discretion of the Programme Director, count 20 credits towards the Diploma.

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.1.

5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates have accumulated at least 100 credits and achieved module marks of not less than 40% in further modules with a total module weight of 20 from the modules listed in 4.1.

5.1.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc candidates must have satisified all the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition must have achieved 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.2.

 

5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Management and Leadership (N G Bailey) (Sept 2007 to Aug 2008 entry)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Management and Leadership
Programme code BSPT77
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twelve and eighteen calendar months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

Entrance Requirements to the programme are:  

i)              possession of a degree or equivalent

Or

ii)             possession of the requisite managerial experience, and normally with employment in an appropriate management position, as determined by the Programme Director.

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in their chosen industry sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • prepare participants for management roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
  • provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
  • enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
  • enhance the career development and employability of participants;
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with the N G Bailey Organisation.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:

  • The impact of contextual forces on organisations including ethical, economic, environmental, social and technological change issues;
  • The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
  • The concepts, processes and institutions in the production and marketing of goods and / or services; the management of resources and operations;
  • The financing of the business enterprise:  sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
  • The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;
  • The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;
  • The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;
  • The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context to meet stakeholder interests;
  • A range of contemporary issues impacting on various areas of management;
  • The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • manage creative processes in self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
  • establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
  • use models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
  • identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;
  • recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
  • conduct research into business and management issues;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • apply leadership and performance management techniques, selecting the appropriate style for situations;
  • perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
  • engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
  • employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • scan and organise data; abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
  • listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
  • use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
  • demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
  • interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
  • manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;
  • enhance their career prospects and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisation.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Modules

      4.1.1 Level 1 (total modular weight 60)                                                                Module Weight

BSP933

Understanding Self and Career 1: Implications for Leadership

10

BSP938

Financial Management 1

10

BSP943

Planning 1

10

BSP948

Leading Individuals and Teams 1

10

BSP953

Information Management 1

10

BSP959

Marketing 1

5

BSP963

Business Ethics and Corporate Social Responsibility 1

5

 

     

      4.1.2 Level 2 (total modular weight 60

BSP911

Financial Management 2

10

BSP914

Operations 2

10

BSP917

Transformational Leadership and Change 2

10

BSP920

Information Management 2

10

BSP923

Strategic Marketing Management 2

10

BSP928

Business Ethics and Corporate Social Responsibility 2

10

 

 

4.2 MSc Subjects (total modular weight 60)

BSP763

Masters Project

60

  by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)

 

 

4.3  For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits.  Specifically, candidates must have completed all of the level 1 modules listed in 4.1.  This specific reqirement may however be waived at the discretion of the Programme Director.

5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with total modular weight of 120. Specifically, candidates must have completed all of the level 1 and level 2 modules from 4.1.1 and 4.1.2.  

Candidates must also have accumulated at least 100 credits and achieved module marks of not less than 40% in further modules with a total module weight of 20.

5.1.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc candidates must have satisified all the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition must have achieved 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.2.

 

5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Management and Leadership (Public) (Sept 2008 to Aug 2013)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip/ PGCert
Programme title Management and Leadership
Programme code BSPT60
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twelve and eighteen calendar months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/managementleadership/

 

and the following: 

 

Entrance Requirements to the programme are: 

i)              possession of a degree or equivalent

Or

ii)             possession of the requisite managerial experience, and normally with employment in an appropriate management position, as determined by the Programme Director.

 

See also Exemptions under Programme Structure below.

 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in their chosen industry sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • prepare participants for management roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
  • provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
  • enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
  • enhance the career development and employability of participants;
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with business organisations.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:

  • The impact of contextual forces on organisations including ethical, economic, environmental, social and technological change issues;
  • The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
  • The concepts, processes and institutions in the production and marketing of goods and / or services; the management of resources and operations;
  • The financing of the business enterprise:  sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
  • The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;
  • The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;
  • The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;
  • The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context to meet stakeholder interests;
  • A range of contemporary issues impacting on various areas of management;
  • The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • manage creative processes in self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
  • establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
  • use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
  • identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;
  • recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
  • conduct research into business and management issues;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • apply leadership and performance management selecting the appropriate style for situations;
  • perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
  • engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
  • employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • scan and organise data; abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
  • listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
  • use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
  • demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
  • interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
  • manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;
  • enhance their career prospects and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisations.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Compulsory Subjects 

       4.1.1 Level 1 (total modular weight 50)

 

 

Module Weight

BSP805

Financial Management 1

10

BSP810

Planning and Operations 1

10

BSP815

Leading People to Influence Performance 1

10

BSP820

Information Management 1

10

BSP825

Marketing 1

10

  

4.1.2 Level 2 (total modular weight 50)

BSP855

Financial Management 2

10

BSP860

Planning and Operations 2

10

BSP865

Leading the Team 2

10

BSP870

Information Management 2

10

BSP875

Strategic Marketing Management 2

10

  

4.2 Optional Subjects

4.2.1 Level 1 (total modular weight 10)

BSP830

Sales and Marketing 1

10

BSP832

Retailing 1

10

BSP834

Total Quality 1

10

BSP836

Selling Skills 1

10

BSP838

Problem Solving and Decision Making 1

10

BSP840

Occupational Health & Safety Management 1

10

BSP842

Merchandising

10

BSP844

Effective Management in Small Firms 1

10

BSP846

Managing Small Business Growth 1

10

BSP847

The Self-Managed Coach 1

10

BSP885

Personnel Management 1

10

 

4.2.2 Level 2 (total modular weight 10)

BSP848

The Self-Managed Coach 2

10

BSP880

Retailing 2

10

BSP882

Total Quality 2

10

BSP884

Sales Management 2

10

BSP886

Forecasting and Decision Making 2

10

BSP888

Personnel Management 2

10

BSP892

New Product and Service Development 2

10

BSP894

Effective Management in Small Firms 2

10

BSP896

Managing Small Business Growth 2

10

  

4.3 MSc Subjects (total modular weight 60)

BSP763

Masters Project

60

  by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)

 

4.4 The choice of optional subjects will be made from those available.  Information on the up-to-date position is available from the School of Business and Economics.

4.5 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

 

4.6  Exemptions

With the permission of the Programme Director 60 credits may be obtained towards the award of Diploma on the basis of successful completion of all modules on the Postgraduate Certificate in Continuing Professional Development. 

Candidates with the award of Loughborough University Professional Certificate in Management may count 60 credits towards the award of Diploma.

Candidates who were awarded the Loughborough University Professional Diploma in Management prior to 2001 may count 100 credits towards the award of an MSc.

Candidates who were awarded the Loughborough University Professional Diploma in Management after 2001 may count 120 credits towards the award of an MSc.

Candidates who are members of the following approved accountancy bodies may, at the discretion of the Programme Director, count 10 credits towards the Loughborough University Postgraduate Certificate in Management and Leadership or 20 credits towards the Loughborough University Postgraduate Diploma in Management and Leadership.  Such candidates who already hold the Loughborough University Postgraduate Certificate (as outlined in 1.6 above) would only be able to count an additional 10 credits to the 60 credits they already have. 

  • Association of Chartered Certified Accountants (ACCA)
  • Chartered Institute of Management Accounts (CIMA)
  • Chartered Institute of Public Finance and Accounting (CIPFA)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales (ICAEW)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland (ICAS)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants of Ireland (ICAI)

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits.  Specifically, candidates must complete all of the level 1 modules listed in 4.1.1 (modular weight 50 credits) and one level 1 module from those listed in 4.2.1 (modular weight 10 credits).  This specific requirement may however be waived at the discretion of the Programme Director.

5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with total modular weight of 120.  Specifically, candidates must have completed all of the compulsory level 1 and level 2 modules from 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 (modular weight 100), one optional level 1 module from 4.2.1 (modular weight 10) and, one optional level 2 module from 4.2.2 (modular weight 10).   This specific requirement may however be waived at the discretion of the Programme Director.   The optional modules taken at level 2 should complement those taken at level 1.  

Candidates must also have accumulated at least 100 credits and achieved module marks of not less than 40% in further modules with a total module weight of 20.

5.1.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc candidates must have satisified all the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition must have achieved 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.3.

 

5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Management and Leadership (Professional) (Aggregate Industries) (Sept 2011 to Aug 2013)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Management and Leadership (Professional)
Programme code BSPT62
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twelve and eighteen calendar months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/managementleadership/

 

and the following: 

 

Entrance Requirements to the programme are:

i)              possession of a degree or equivalent

Or

ii)             possession of the requisite managerial experience, and normally with employment in an appropriate management position, as determined by the Programme Director.

1.5         Candidates who are members of the following approved accountancy bodies (subject to the approval of the Programme Director) may count 10 credits towards the Loughborough University Postgraduate Certificate in Management and Leadership or 20 credits towards the Loughborough University Postgraduate Diploma in Management and Leadership.

  • Association of Chartered Certified Accountants (ACCA)
  • Chartered Institute of Management Accounts (CIMA)
  • Chartered Institute of Public Finance and Accounting (CIPFA)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales (ICAEW)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland (ICAS)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants of Ireland (ICAI)

 

 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in their chosen industry sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • prepare participants for management roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
  • provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
  • enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
  • enhance the career development and employability of participants;
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with Aggregate Industries.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:

  • The impact of contextual forces on organisations including ethical, economic, environmental, social and technological change issues;
  • The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
  • The concepts, processes and institutions in the production and marketing of goods and / or services; the management of resources and operations;
  • The financing of the business enterprise:  sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
  • The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;
  • The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;
  • The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;
  • The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context to meet stakeholder interests;
  • A range of contemporary issues impacting on various areas of management;
  • The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • manage creative processes in self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
  • establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
  • use models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
  • identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;
  • recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
  • conduct research into business and management issues;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • apply leadership and performance management techniques, selecting the appropriate style for situations;
  • perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
  • engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
  • employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • scan and organise data; abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
  • listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
  • use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
  • demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
  • interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
  • manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;
  • enhance their career prospects and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisation.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Modules 

4.1.1 (total modular weight 120)

BSP901

Foundations of Management Learning & Personal Development

10

BSP902

Transformational Leadership and Change Management

10

BSP903

Information & Knowledge Management

20

BSP904

Financial Management

20

BSP906

Strategic Marketing Management

20

BSP907

Strategic & Operations Management

20

BSP963

Project Management 1

10

BSP928

Project Management 2

10

  

4.2  MSc Subjects (total modular weight 60)

BSP763

Masters Project

60

 

4.3 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also to be eligible for the award of MSc in Management & Leadership (Professional) must have achieved 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.2.

5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Management and Leadership (Professional) (Aggregate Industries) (Sept 08- Aug 11 entry)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip/ PGCert
Programme title Management and Leadership (Professional)
Programme code BSPT62
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twelve and eighteen calendar months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/managementleadership/

 

and the following: 

 

Entrance Requirements to the programme are:

i)              possession of a degree or equivalent

Or

ii)             possession of the requisite managerial experience, and normally with employment in an appropriate management position, as determined by the Programme Director.

 

Candidates who are members of the following approved accountancy bodies (subject to the approval of the Programme Director) may count 10 credits towards the Loughborough University Postgraduate Certificate in Management and Leadership or 20 credits towards the Loughborough University Postgraduate Diploma in Management and Leadership. 

  • Association of Chartered Certified Accountants (ACCA)
  • Chartered Institute of Management Accounts (CIMA)
  • Chartered Institute of Public Finance and Accounting (CIPFA)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales (ICAEW)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland (ICAS)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants of Ireland (ICAI)
Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in their chosen industry sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • prepare participants for management roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
  • provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
  • enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
  • enhance the career development and employability of participants;
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with Aggregate Industries.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:

  • The impact of contextual forces on organisations including ethical, economic, environmental, social and technological change issues;
  • The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
  • The concepts, processes and institutions in the production and marketing of goods and / or services; the management of resources and operations;
  • The financing of the business enterprise:  sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
  • The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;
  • The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;
  • The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;
  • The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context to meet stakeholder interests;
  • A range of contemporary issues impacting on various areas of management;
  • The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • manage creative processes in self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
  • establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
  • use models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
  • identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;
  • recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
  • conduct research into business and management issues;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • apply leadership and performance management techniques, selecting the appropriate style for situations;
  • perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
  • engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
  • employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • scan and organise data; abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
  • listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
  • use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
  • demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
  • interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
  • manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;
  • enhance their career prospects and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisation.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Modules 

4.1.1 (total modular weight 120)

BSP901

Foundations of Management Learning & Personal Development

10

BSP902

Transformational Leadership and Change Management

10

BSP903

Information & Knowledge Management

20

BSP904

Financial Management

20

BSP905

Occupational Health & Safety Management

20

BSP906

Strategic Marketing Management

20

BSP907

Strategic & Operations Management

20

   

4.2  MSc Subjects (total modular weight 60)

BSP763

Masters Project

60

  

4.3 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also to be eligible for the award of MSc in Management & Leadership (Professional) candidates must have achieved 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.2.

5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Occupational Health and Safety Management (Oct 2011 to Sept 2014 entry)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Holders of the Diploma or MSc satisfy the academic requirements for graduate membership of the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health

Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Occupational Health and Safety Management
Programme code BSPT50
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twenty-eight calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is seven and fourteen months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/occupationalhealthandsafetymanagement/

 

and  also the following:

Entrance requirements to the programme:

i)                Possession of a degree or equivalent 

Or 

ii)               Have achieved the academic requirements for corporate membership of a British Chartered professional institution.

Or 

iii)              Hold any other relevant qualification or professional experience as determined by the Programme Director together with a reasonable level of formal academic education.

 

Exemptions 

Students holding the diploma in Occupational Safety and Health as awarded by: 

i)          The National Examination Board in Occupational Safety and Health (National or International Diploma) and accredited by the QCA and the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health; or

ii)         The British Safety Council Level 6 Diploma, and accredited by the QCA and the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health; or

iii)        another Higher Education Institute accredited by the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health 

may be admitted to the Programme and given exemption from modules BSP540–BSP544 inclusive, and given 75 credits transfer for their existing award.

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The multi-disciplinary Postgraduate Programme in Occupational Health and Safety Management is aimed at professional health and safety advisors and managerial, engineering and scientific staff who have a significant responsibility for occupational health and safety.

The programme uses a combination of short courses and distance learning modules for part-time study.

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management progression in occupational safety and health in their chosen industry sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual, research and analytical abilities;
  • enhance the career development and employability of participants;
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating;
  • the academic basis for chartered membership of the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The Programme conforms to the benchmarks published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education in respect of Masters awards in business and management . Specifically the programme meets the requirements of a specialist Masters degree (Type 1) for a career development.

The following additional reference points also provide a benchmark for programme development, delivery and content: 

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

  • the structure and application of occupational health and safety law;
  • advanced risk assessment techniques;
  • the features and application of an occupational health and safety management system;
  • the significant physical hazards in workplaces and their respective controls;
  • the significant occupational health hazards in workplaces and their respective controls;
  • the relevance and application of human factors to occupational health and safety management;
  • the uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • identify and critically apply the legal framework to a complex range of occupational health and safety situations;
  • establish criteria in respect of the tolerability of individual and organisational risk;
  • assess a broad range of health and safety risks using complex tools;
  • critically evaluate the effectiveness of any occupational health and safety intervention;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • influence the development of occupational health and safety policy;
  • engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a health and safety context;
  • employ qualitative and quantitative skills;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of occupational health and safety-related materials including  journals,  legislation, approved codes of practice and recognised guidance.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • scan and organise data and communicate knowledge;
  • use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
  • listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
  • use effective oral and written communication using a range of media including written reports;
  • interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
  • manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;
  • enhance their career prospects and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisation.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Modules 

 

 

Module Weight

BSP540

Occupational Health and Safety and the Law

15

BSP541

Risk Management

15

BSP542*

Management of Physical Hazards

15

BSP543*

Occupational Health Management

15

BSP544          

Safety and the Management of People

15

BSP545

Occupational Health and Safety Management Evidence Based Practical Project

45

BSP546

Occupational Health and Safety Management Evidence Based Practical Project

45

BSP514

Occupational Health and Safety Management Research Project

60

BSP547†/BSPA01†

Occupational Health and Safety Management Research Project

60

 * by distance learning

partially by distance learning (>50%)

 

4.2 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

 

 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits.  Specifically, candidates must complete modules, BSP540, BSP541 and two others chosen from BSP542-544.                                                 

5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with total modular weight of 120 credits.  Specifically, candidates must complete modules BSP540-545 inclusive.

Candidates must also have accumulated at least 105 credits and achieved a module mark of not less than 40% in a further module with a module weight of 15.

5.1.3 Apart from circumstances detailed in 5.1.4, to be eligible for the award of MSc, candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition, must have accumulated 60 credits from module BSP514 or BSP547/BSPA01.

Candidates must have also have accumulated at least 165 credits and achieved a module mark of not less than 40% in a further module with a module weight of 15.

5.1.4 Holders of recognized diplomas as detailed in Exemptions (see Admissions Criteria section above) to be eligible for the award of MSc, must have accumulated 105 credits. Specifically, candidates must complete modules BSP546 and BSP547/BSPA01.

 

 

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Occupational Health and Safety Management (Oct 2009- Sept 2011 entry)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Holders of the Diploma or MSc satisfy the academic requirements for chartered membership of the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health

Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Occupational Health and Safety Management
Programme code BSPT50
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twenty-eight calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is seven and fourteen months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/occupationalhealthandsafetymanagement/

and also the following:

Entrance requirements to the programme:

i)                Possession of a degree or equivalent

Or

ii)               Have achieved the academic requirements for corporate membership of a British Chartered professional institution.

Or

iii)              Hold any other relevant qualification or professional experience as determined by the Programme Director together with a reasonable level of formal academic education.

 

Exemptions

Students holding the diploma in Occupational Safety and Health as awarded by the:

i)          National Examination Board in Occupational Safety and Health (National Diploma) and accredited by the QCA and the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health; or the

ii)         British Safety Council Level 6 and accredited by the QCA and the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health; or

iii)        a Diploma in Occupational Safety and Health from another Higher Education Institute accredited by the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health 

may be admitted to the Programme and given exemption from modules BSP540–BSP544 inclusive, and given 75 credits transfer for their existing award.

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The multi-disciplinary Postgraduate Programme in Occupational Health and Safety Management is aimed at professional health and safety advisors and managerial, engineering and scientific staff who have a significant responsibility for occupational health and safety.

The programme uses a combination of short courses and distance learning modules for part-time study.

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management progression in occupational safety and health in their chosen industry sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual, research and analytical abilities;
  • enhance the career development and employability of participants;
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating;
  • the academic basis for chartered membership of the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The Programme conforms to the benchmarks published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education in respect of Masters awards in business and management . Specifically the programme meets the requirements of a specialist Masters degree (Type 1) for a career development.

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

  • the structure and application of occupational health and safety law;
  • advanced risk assessment techniques;
  • the features and application of an occupational health and safety management system;
  • the significant physical hazards in workplaces and their respective controls;
  • the significant occupational health hazards in workplaces and their respective controls;
  • the relevance and application of human factors to occupational health and safety management;
  • the uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • identify and critically apply the legal framework to a complex range of occupational health and safety situations;
  • establish criteria in respect of the tolerability of individual and organisational risk;
  • assess a broad range of health and safety risks using complex tools;
  • critically evaluate the effectiveness of any occupational health and safety intervention;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • influence the development of occupational health and safety policy;
  • engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a health and safety context;
  • employ qualitative and quantitative skills;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of occupational health and safety-related materials including  journals,  legislation, approved codes of practice and recognised guidance.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • scan and organise data and communicate knowledge;
  • use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
  • listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
  • use effective oral and written communication using a range of media including written reports;
  • interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
  • manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;
  • enhance their career prospects and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisation.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Modules

 

 

Module Weight

BSP540

Occupational Health and Safety and the Law

15

BSP541

Risk Management

15

BSP542*

Management of Physical Hazards

15

BSP543*

Occupational Health Management

15

BSP544          

Safety and the Management of People

15

BSP545

Occupational Health and Safety Management Evidence Based Practical Project

45

BSP546

Occupational Health and Safety Management Evidence Based Practical Project

45

BSP514

Occupational Health and Safety Management Research Project

60

BSP547†/BSPA01†

Occupational Health and Safety Management Research Project

60

* by distance learning

partially by distance learning (>50%)

 

4.2 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

 

 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits.  Specifically, candidates must complete modules, BSP540, BSP541 and two others chosen from BSP542-544.

5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with total modular weight of 120 credits.  Specifically, candidates must complete modules BSP540-545 inclusive.

Candidates must also have accumulated at least 105 credits and achieved a module mark of not less than 40% in a further module with a module weight of 15.

5.1.3 Apart from circumstances detailed in 5.1.4, to be eligible for the award of MSc, candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition, must have accumulated 60 credits from module BSP514 or BSP547/BSPA01.

Candidates must have also have accumulated at least 165 credits and achieved a module mark of not less than 40% in a further module with a module weight of 15.

5.1.4 Holders of recognized diplomas as detailed in Exemptions (see Admissions Criteria section above) to be eligible for the award of MSc, must have accumulated 105 credits. Specifically, candidates must complete modules BSP546 and BSP547/BSPA01.

 5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Occupational Health and Safety Management (Oct 2005- Sept 2009 entry)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Holders of the Diploma or MSc satisfy the academic requirements for chartered membership of the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health

Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Occupational Health and Safety Management
Programme code BSPT50
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twenty-eight calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is seven and fourteen months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/occupationalhealthandsafetymanagement/

and also the following: 

Entrance requirements to the programme: 

i)          possession of a degree or equivalent from a Higher Education institute of the UK;

Or

ii)         have achieved the academic requirements for corporate membership of a British chartered professional body;

Or

iii)        hold any other relevant qualification and experience approved by the University. 

 

Exemptions

Students holding the diploma in Occupational Safety and Health as awarded by the: 

i)          National Examination Board in Occupational Safety and Health and accredited by the QCA and the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health; or the

ii)         British Safety Council and accredited by the QCA and the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health; or

iii)        a Diploma in Occupational Safety and Health from another Higher Education Institute accredited by the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health 

may be admitted to the Programme and given exemption from modules BSP540–BSP544 inclusive, and given 75 credits transfer for their existing award.

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The multi-disciplinary Postgraduate Programme in Occupational Health and Safety Management is aimed at professional health and safety advisors and managerial, engineering and scientific staff who have a significant responsibility for occupational health and safety.

The programme uses a combination of short courses and distance learning modules for part-time study.

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management progression in occupational safety and health in their chosen industry sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual, research and analytical abilities;
  • enhance the career development and employability of participants;
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating;
  • the academic basis for chartered membership of the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The Programme conforms to the benchmarks published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education in respect of Masters awards in business and management . Specifically the programme meets the requirements of a specialist Masters degree (Type 1) for a career development.

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

  • the structure and application of occupational health and safety law;
  • advanced risk assessment techniques;
  • the features and application of an occupational health and safety management system;
  • the significant physical hazards in workplaces and their respective controls;
  • the significant occupational health hazards in workplaces and their respective controls;
  • the relevance and application of human factors to occupational health and safety management;
  • the uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • identify and critically apply the legal framework to a complex range of occupational health and safety situations;
  • establish criteria in respect of the tolerability of individual and organisational risk;
  • assess a broad range of health and safety risks using complex tools;
  • critically evaluate the effectiveness of any occupational health and safety intervention;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • influence the development of occupational health and safety policy;
  • engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a health and safety context;
  • employ qualitative and quantitative skills;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of occupational health and safety-related materials including  journals,  legislation, approved codes of practice and recognised guidance.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • scan and organise data and communicate knowledge;
  • use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
  • listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
  • use effective oral and written communication using a range of media including written reports;
  • interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
  • manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;
  • enhance their career prospects and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisation.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Modules

 

 

Module Weight

BSP540

Occupational Health and Safety and the Law

15

BSP541

Risk Management

15

BSP542*

Management of Physical Hazards

15

BSP543*

Occupational Health Management

15

BSP544          

Safety and the Management of People

15

BSP545

Occupational Health and Safety Management: Practical Project

45

BSP546

Occupational Health and Safety Management: Practical Project

45

BSP514

Occupational Health and Safety Management: Research Project

60

BSP547†/BSPA01†

Occupational Health and Safety Management: Research Project

60

* by distance learning

partially by distance learning (>50%)

 

4.2 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

 

 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits.  Specifically, candidates must complete modules, BSP540, BSP541 and two others chosen from BSP542-544.

5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with total modular weight of 120 credits.  Specifically, candidates must complete modules BSP540-545 inclusive.

Candidates must also have accumulated at least 105 credits and achieved a module mark of not less than 40% in a further module with a module weight of 15.

5.1.3 Apart from circumstances detailed in 5.1.4, to be eligible for the award of MSc, candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition, must have accumulated 60 credits from module BSP514 or BSP547/BSPA01.

Candidates must have also have accumulated at least 165 credits and achieved a module mark of not less than 40% in a further module with a module weight of 15.

5.1.4 Holders of recognized diplomas as detailed in Exemptions (see Admissions Criteria section above) to be eligible for the award of MSc, must have accumulated 105 credits. Specifically, candidates must complete modules BSP546 and BSP547/BSPA01. 

5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Security Management (DL) (Sept 2009- Aug 2010)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Security Management
Programme code BSPT52
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty-six calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is sixteen and twenty-four calendar months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/securitymanagement/

 

and also the following: 

 

Entrance requirements to the programme are:

i)                Possession of a degree or equivalent

Or

ii)               Have achieved the academic requirements for corporate membership of a British Chartered professional institution.

Or

iii)              Hold any other relevant qualification or professional experience as determined by the Programme Director together with a reasonable level of formal academic education.

 

Candidates who were awarded the Loughborough University Postgraduate Certificate in Security Management may count a minimum of 60 credits towards the award of Diploma.

Candidates who were awarded the Loughborough University Postgraduate Diploma in Security Management may count a minimum of 105 credits towards the award of an MSc.

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

  • To promote knowledge and understanding in the subject of Security Management.
  • To provide advanced training where an opportunity is afforded for the security professional to bring together professional expertise and growing academic abilities.
  • To promote security management as a serious subject for academic study within the security industry.
  • To enhance the self-esteem of the participating students and to establish security management as a relevant discipline within the corporate environment in order that it might rank alongside other management disciplines.
  • To assist individuals with career development, advancement of their professional competence and standing, and their lifelong learning.
  • To provide an opportunity for security professionals from uniformed backgrounds to migrate into the corporate and private sector security domains.
  • To provide a unique academic qualification in security management, that brings together professional expertise and academic disciplines relevant to this interdisciplinary field.
  • To assist with entry into security representative bodies, for example The Security Institute, Association of Security Consultants and to assist in gaining Fellow status.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The Programme conforms to the benchmarks published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education in respect of Masters awards in business and management in 2002. Specifically the programme meets the requirements of a specialist Masters degree (Type 1 B). 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of;

Organisational behaviour, managing organisational change, and how such concepts interact with the role of the security manager.   Have a critical understanding of professional standards of behaviour and ethical conduct, together with security licensing arrangements via the Security Industry Authority framework.  Students should also understand the due legal process and the key elements associated with a crime and various criminological perspectives.  Additionally, an awareness of how the legal systems; criminal, civil and industrial tribunals impact on the work undertaken by the security professional.  Students must also understand the nuances associated with operating within both corporate and criminal domains and have an appreciation of Human Rights legislation and its’ impact upon the security industry.  The concept of pure risk, risk assessments, business continuity and contingency planning must be clearly understood.  Students must have a clear understanding of the international standards to be applied in the fields of business continuity and contingency planning.  Students will also gain knowledge of fraudulent activity, key principles of physical security (including closed circuit television) and of fraud prevention strategies.  An appreciation of the Fraud Act 2006 and the new bribery and corruption act must also be in evidence.   Data and Information Technology Security must also be understood including the relevant legal framework and countermeasures.

However the levels of knowledge and understanding are linked to the study programme undertaken, i.e. Postgraduate Certificate, Postgraduate Diploma or MSc.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to understand security management as both a practically and academically based profession that adds real value to an organisation’s effectiveness, including financial performance as opposed to being regarded as a general overhead cost. Students should also view security management not only in problem solving mode but conceptually. They should be able to conceptualise various security problems and appreciate the ramifications of various courses of action. But most important of all, the solutions on offer must be based upon credible evidence and graduates must be willing to challenge conventional wisdom.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to understand and debate the changing nature of organisations and critically analyse the nature of management and motivators within a security management context. They should also be placed in a position to understand and to apply financial appraisal systems.   Students should also appreciate the importance of professional standards and ethical frameworks and workplace diversity within a security context. In addition to this they should appreciate the evolving nature of legislation, offender behaviour and be able to construct coping/preventative strategies for dealing with nefarious activity. They should appreciate the rudiments of pure risk, be able to analyse problems and offer up practical cost effective solutions. Students should be able to apply the various crime prevention theories in a practical setting and analyse logically crime statistics. They must be capable of devising policies and procedures to deal with physical, data protection and information technology security issues, these to include risk assessment, business continuity and contingency planning.

Student shouldgain an appreciation of computer related crime and the application of various security countermeasures. All students should be able to conduct and evaluate primary and secondary research in the field of security.  Students are aware of the various security related international standards and their location and interpretation when policy documents have to be written.

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to write a good quality academic essay in both a logical and coherent fashion in a variety of security related settings by making use of a variety of information sources. This skill set should prove invaluable when the security manager is detailing a business case to acquire additional resources.

The student will also be capable of critical analysis of source material and have the ability to work to a pre-set timescale, and independently of others, in an organised fashion.  An ability to manage time efficiently, must also be demonstrated.

 

 

4. Programme structure

4.1 Compulsory Subjects (total modular weight of 15) 

 

 

Module Weight

BSP551*

Business Management Skills

15


 

4.2 Optional Subjects 

BSP552*

Law and Criminology

15

BSP553*

Physical Security and Fraud and Information Security

15

BSP554*

Information Technology Security

15

BSP555*

Security Risk Management

15

BSP557*

Diploma Project

45

  

4.3 MSc Subjects (total modular weight of 60)

BSP558*

Masters Project

60

*           by Distance Learning

 

4.4 The choice of optional subjects will be made from those available.  Information on the up-to-date position is available from the School of Business and Economics. 

4.5 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

 

4.6 Exemptions

If applicants possess certain prior qualifications they may be considered for exemption from some modules. 

(i) Consideration for exemption from BSP552 will be given if candidates have a first degree in law from a UK University.

(ii) Applicants possessing a recognised Postgraduate Diploma in Security Management, from another UK University, may be considered for the Masters with exemption from certain modules, providing the final award totals 180 credits.

(iii) Exemption from the compulsory modules, BSP551 and BSP558 will not normally be granted.

(iv) Any exemptions to be offered must be at the final discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching).

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1  In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:.

5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits.  Specifically, candidates must complete and achieve credit in BSP551, BSP553, BSP554 and BSP555.

5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 120.  Specifically, candidates must have completed the compulsory module listed in 4.1 (modular weight 15 credits), four optional modules from those listed in 4.2 (modular weight 60 credits) and the Diploma Project (modular weight 45 credits).

Candidates must also have accumulated at least 105 credits and achieved module marks of not less than 40% in further modules with a total module weight of 15.

5.1.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc, candidates must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 180.  Specifically, candidates must have completed the compulsory module listed in 4.1 (modular weight 15 credits), four optional modules from those listed in 4.2 (modular weight 60 credits), the Diploma Project (modular weight 45 credits).  In addition the candidate must complete the Masters Project module listed in 4.3.

Candidates must also have accumulated at least 165 credits and achieved module marks of not less than 40% in one further module with a total module weight of 15. 

5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

 

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Security Management (DL) (Sept 2007- Aug 2009 entry)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Security Management
Programme code BSPT52
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty-six calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twelve and twenty-four calendar months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/securitymanagement/

 

and also the following: 

 

Entrance requirements to the programme are: 

i)                Possession of a degree or equivalent

Or

ii)               Possession of the requisite security experiences gained within a working environment, as determined by the Programme Director together with a reasonable level of formal academic education.

 

Candidates who were awarded the Loughborough University Postgraduate Certificate in Security Management may count a minimum of 45 credits towards the award of Diploma.

Candidates who were awarded the Loughborough University Postgraduate Diploma in Security Management may count a minimum of 105 credits towards the award of an MSc.

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

  • To promote knowledge and understanding in the subject of Security Management.
  • To provide advanced training where an opportunity is afforded for the security professional to bring together professional expertise and growing academic abilities.
  • To promote security management as a serious subject for academic study within the security industry.
  • To enhance the self-esteem of the participating students and to establish security management as a relevant discipline within the corporate environment in order that it might rank alongside other management disciplines.
  • To assist individuals with career development, advancement of their professional competence and standing, and their lifelong learning.
  • To provide an opportunity for security professionals from uniformed backgrounds to migrate into the corporate and private sector security domains.
  • To provide a unique academic qualification in security management, that brings together professional expertise and academic disciplines relevant to this interdisciplinary field.
  • To assist with entry into security representative bodies, for example The Security Institute, Association of Security Consultants and to assist in gaining Fellow status.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The Programme conforms to the benchmarks published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education in respect of Masters awards in business and management in 2002. Specifically the programme meets the requirements of a specialist Masters degree (Type 1 B). 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of;

Organisational behaviour, managing organisational change, and how such concepts interact with the role of the security manager.   Have a critical understanding of professional standards of behaviour and ethical conduct, together with security licensing arrangements via the Security Industry Authority framework.  Students should also understand the due legal process and the key elements associated with a crime and various criminological perspectives.  Additionally, an awareness of how the legal systems; criminal, civil and industrial tribunals impact on the work undertaken by the security professional.  Students must also understand the nuances associated with operating within both corporate and criminal domains and have an appreciation of Human Rights legislation and its’ impact upon the security industry.  The concept of pure risk, risk assessments, business continuity and contingency planning must be clearly understood.  Students must have a clear understanding of the international standards to be applied in the fields of business continuity and contingency planning.  Students will also gain knowledge of fraudulent activity, key principles of physical security (including closed circuit television) and of fraud prevention strategies.  An appreciation of the Fraud Act 2006 and the new bribery and corruption act must also be in evidence.   Data and Information Technology Security must also be understood including the relevant legal framework and countermeasures.

However the levels of knowledge and understanding are linked to the study programme undertaken, i.e. Postgraduate Certificate, Postgraduate Diploma or MSc.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to understand security management as both a practically and academically based profession that adds real value to an organisation’s effectiveness, including financial performance as opposed to being regarded as a general overhead cost. Students should also view security management not only in problem solving mode but conceptually. They should be able to conceptualise various security problems and appreciate the ramifications of various courses of action. But most important of all, the solutions on offer must be based upon credible evidence and graduates must be willing to challenge conventional wisdom.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to understand and debate the changing nature of organisations and critically analyse the nature of management and motivators within a security management context. They should also be placed in a position to understand and to apply financial appraisal systems.   Students should also appreciate the importance of professional standards and ethical frameworks and workplace diversity within a security context. In addition to this they should appreciate the evolving nature of legislation, offender behaviour and be able to construct coping/preventative strategies for dealing with nefarious activity. They should appreciate the rudiments of pure risk, be able to analyse problems and offer up practical cost effective solutions. Students should be able to apply the various crime prevention theories in a practical setting and analyse logically crime statistics. They must be capable of devising policies and procedures to deal with physical, data protection and information technology security issues, these to include risk assessment, business continuity and contingency planning.

Student shouldgain an appreciation of computer related crime and the application of various security countermeasures. All students should be able to conduct and evaluate primary and secondary research in the field of security.  Students are aware of the various security related international standards and their location and interpretation when policy documents have to be written.

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to write a good quality academic essay in both a logical and coherent fashion in a variety of security related settings by making use of a variety of information sources. This skill set should prove invaluable when the security manager is detailing a business case to acquire additional resources.

The student will also be capable of critical analysis of source material and have the ability to work to a pre-set timescale, and independently of others, in an organised fashion.  An ability to manage time efficiently, must also be demonstrated.

 

 

4. Programme structure

4.1  Compulsory Subjects (total modular weight of 15)

 

 

 

Module Weight

BSP551*

Business Management Skills

15

 

 

4.2 Optional Subjects

BSP552*

Law and Criminology

15

BSP553*

Physical Security and Fraud and Information Security

15

BSP554*

Information Technology Security

15

BSP555*

Security Risk Management

15

BSP557*

Diploma Project

45

 

 

4.3 MSc Subjects (total modular weight of 60)

BSP558*

Masters Project

60

 * by Distance Learning

 

4.4 The choice of optional subjects will be made from those available.  Information on the up-to-date position is available from the School of Business and Economics.

 

4.5 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

 

4.6 Exemptions

If applicants possess certain prior qualifications they may be considered for exemption from some modules. 

5.1         Consideration for exemption from BSP552 will be given if candidates have a first degree in law from a UK University.

5.2         Applicants possessing a recognised Diploma in Security Management, from another UK University, may be considered for the Masters with exemption from certain modules, providing the final award totals 180 credits.

5.3         Exemption from the compulsory modules, BSP551 and BSP558 will not normally be granted.

5.4         Any exemptions to be offered must be at the final discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching).

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1  In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits.  Specifically, candidates must complete and achieve credit in BSP551, BSP553, BSP554 and BSP555.

5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 120.  Specifically, candidates must have completed the compulsory module listed in 4.1 (modular weight 15 credits), four optional modules from those listed in 4.2 (modular weight 60 credits) and the Diploma Project (modular weight 45 credits).

Candidates must also have accumulated at least 105 credits and achieved module marks of not less than 40% in further modules with a total module weight of 15.

5.1.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc, candidates must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 180.  Specifically, candidates must have completed the compulsory module listed in 4.1 (modular weight 15 credits), four optional modules from those listed in 4.2 (modular weight 60 credits), the Diploma Project (modular weight 45 credits).  In addition the candidate must complete the Masters Project module listed in 4.3.

Candidates must also have accumulated at least 165 credits and achieved module marks of not less than 40% in one further module with a total module weight of 15.

5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period. 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Security Management (DL) (pre-Sept 2007 entry)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Security Management
Programme code BSPT52
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty-six calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twenty-four calendar months.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/securitymanagement/

 

and also the following: 

 

Entrance requirements to the programme are:

i)                Possession of a degree or equivalent

Or

ii)               Possession of the requisite security experiences gained within a working environment, as determined by the Programme Director.

 

Candidates who were awarded the Loughborough University Postgraduate Certificate in Security Management may count a minimum of 45 credits towards the award of Diploma.

Candidates who were awarded the Loughborough University Postgraduate Diploma in Security Management may count a minimum of 105 credits towards the award of an MSc.

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

  • To promote knowledge and understanding in the subject of Security Management.
  • To provide advanced training where an opportunity is afforded for the security professional to bring together professional expertise and growing academic abilities.
  • To promote security management as a serious subject for academic study within the security industry.
  • To enhance the self-esteem of the participating students and to establish security management as a relevant discipline within the corporate environment in order that it might rank alongside other management disciplines.
  • To assist individuals with career development, advancement of their professional competence and standing, and their lifelong learning.
  • To provide an opportunity for security professionals from uniformed backgrounds to migrate into the corporate and private sector security domains.
  • To provide a unique academic qualification in security management, that brings together professional expertise and academic disciplines relevant to this interdisciplinary field.
  • To assist with entry into security representative bodies, for example The Security Institute, Association of Security Consultants and to assist in gaining Fellow status.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The Programme conforms to the benchmarks published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education in respect of Masters awards in business and management in 2002. Specifically the programme meets the requirements of a specialist Masters degree (Type 1 B). 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of;

Organisational behaviour, managing organisational change, and how such concepts interact with the role of the security manager.   Have a critical understanding of professional standards of behaviour and ethical conduct, together with security licensing arrangements via the Security Industry Authority framework.  Students should also understand the due legal process and the key elements associated with a crime and various criminological perspectives.  Additionally, an awareness of how the legal systems; criminal, civil and industrial tribunals impact on the work undertaken by the security professional.  Students must also understand the nuances associated with operating within both corporate and criminal domains and have an appreciation of Human Rights legislation and its’ impact upon the security industry.  The concept of pure risk, risk assessments, business continuity and contingency planning must be clearly understood.  Students must have a clear understanding of the international standards to be applied in the fields of business continuity and contingency planning.  Students will also gain knowledge of fraudulent activity, key principles of physical security (including closed circuit television) and of fraud prevention strategies.  An appreciation of the Fraud Act 2006 and the new bribery and corruption act must also be in evidence.   Data and Information Technology Security must also be understood including the relevant legal framework and countermeasures.

However the levels of knowledge and understanding are linked to the study programme undertaken, i.e. Postgraduate Certificate, Postgraduate Diploma or MSc.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to understand security management as both a practically and academically based profession that adds real value to an organisation’s effectiveness, including financial performance as opposed to being regarded as a general overhead cost. Students should also view security management not only in problem solving mode but conceptually. They should be able to conceptualise various security problems and appreciate the ramifications of various courses of action. But most important of all, the solutions on offer must be based upon credible evidence and graduates must be willing to challenge conventional wisdom.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to understand and debate the changing nature of organisations and critically analyse the nature of management and motivators within a security management context. They should also be placed in a position to understand and to apply financial appraisal systems.   Students should also appreciate the importance of professional standards and ethical frameworks and workplace diversity within a security context. In addition to this they should appreciate the evolving nature of legislation, offender behaviour and be able to construct coping/preventative strategies for dealing with nefarious activity. They should appreciate the rudiments of pure risk, be able to analyse problems and offer up practical cost effective solutions. Students should be able to apply the various crime prevention theories in a practical setting and analyse logically crime statistics. They must be capable of devising policies and procedures to deal with physical, data protection and information technology security issues, these to include risk assessment, business continuity and contingency planning.

Student shouldgain an appreciation of computer related crime and the application of various security countermeasures. All students should be able to conduct and evaluate primary and secondary research in the field of security.  Students are aware of the various security related international standards and their location and interpretation when policy documents have to be written.

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to write a good quality academic essay in both a logical and coherent fashion in a variety of security related settings by making use of a variety of information sources. This skill set should prove invaluable when the security manager is detailing a business case to acquire additional resources.

The student will also be capable of critical analysis of source material and have the ability to work to a pre-set timescale, and independently of others, in an organised fashion.  An ability to manage time efficiently, must also be demonstrated.

 

 

4. Programme structure

4.1 Compulsory Subjects (total modular weight of 15)

 

 

Module Weight

BSP551*

Business Management Skills

15

 

4.2 Optional Subjects

BSP552*

Law and Criminology

15

BSP553*

Physical Security and Fraud and Information Security

15

BSP554*

Information Technology Security

15

BSP555*

Security Risk Management

15

BSP556*

Certificate Work-Based Assignment

15

BSP557*

Diploma Project

45

 

4.3 MSc Subjects (total modular weight of 60)

BSP558*

Masters Project

60


*  by Distance Learning

 

4.4 The choice of optional subjects will be made from those available.  Information on the up-to-date position is available from the School of Business and Economics.

 

4.5 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

 

4.6 Exemptions

If applicants possess certain prior qualifications they may be considered for exemption from some modules. 

(i) Consideration for exemption from BSP552 will be given if candidates have a first degree in law from a UK University.

(ii) Applicants possessing a recognised Diploma in Security Management, from another UK University, may be considered for the Masters with exemption from certain modules, providing the final award totals 180 credits.

(iii) Exemption from the compulsory modules, BSP551 and BSP558 will not normally be granted.

(iv) Any exemptions to be offered must be at the final discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching).

 

 

 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits.  Specifically, candidates must complete the compulsory module listed in 4.1 (modular weight 15 credits), two optional modules from those listed in 4.2 (modular weight 30 credits) and the Certificate Work-Based Assignment (modular weight 15 credits).   This specific requirement may be waived at the discretion of the Programme Director.

5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 120.  Specifically, candidates must have completed the compulsory module listed in 4.1 (modular weight 15 credits), four optional modules from those listed in 4.2 (modular weight 60 credits) and the Diploma Project (modular weight 45 credits).

Candidates must also have accumulated at least 105 credits and achieved module marks of not less than 40% in one further module with a total module weight of 15.

5.1.3  To be eligible for the award of MSc, candidates must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 180.  Specifically, candidates must have completed the compulsory module listed in 4.1 (modular weight 15 credits), four optional modules from those listed in 4.2 (modular weight 60 credits), the Diploma Project (modular weight 45 credits).  In addition the candidate must complete the Masters Project module listed in 4.3.

Candidates must also have accumulated at least 165 credits and achieved module marks of not less than 40% in one further module with a total module weight of 15. 

5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Strategic Automotive Dealership Management (Sept 2004 to Aug 2014 entry)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institute of the Motor Industry

Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Strategic Automotive Dealership Management
Programme code BSPT30
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty three calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Diploma and Postgraduate Certificate is twenty four calendar months and twelve calendar months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See; http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/strategicautomotivedealershipmanagement/

 

And the following:

Requirements are those referred to in Regulation XXI.  In addition, admission to the programme will normally be restricted to Dealer Principals and Senior Managers who have at least 5 years managerial experience, or new entrants to the automotive industry with a first degree.

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and develop participants management career progression in the automotive retail sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • develop participants’ automotive retail management roles in which they will be expected to further develop their contribution towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
  • provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
  • enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
  • enhance students’ career development in the automotive sector
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with the automotive industry.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management (MB&M)
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
  • Professional Accreditation by the Institute of the Motor Industry 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

The programme is delivered through a combination of short lectures, individual and group exercises, workshops, and practical sessions.  The modules are highly participative encouraging students to contribute to class discussions and to share personal experiences and concerns with fellow students.  Students are also strongly encouraged to consider situations within their own work environments.

The Programme Director acts in the capacity of a personal tutor and provides students with advice and guidance on academic progress.  Further support/pastoral help is provided by support staff in the CAM team.  Students are required to work both individually and within groups for both study and assessment. A programme handbook is available to each student at the beginning of the programme.  The handbook sets out general advice on study, key regulations on assessment, programme regulations and module specifications for all modules available for study.  At each module, further information is provided including a module outline which details the lecture schedule and associated reading guidance.

Constructive criticism is provided to students on coursework assignments throughout the programme.

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:

  • The impact of environmental forces on automotive sector organisations including ethical, economic, political, social and technological change issues;
  • The development and operation of the sector specific markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
  • The concepts and processes in the production and marketing of automotive goods and services, and the management of resources and operations;
  • The financing of the automotive dealer network involving the sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
  • The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;
  • The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on dealership operations;
  • The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;
  • The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context of the automotive sector to meet stakeholder interests;
  • The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment;
  • The roles, responsibilities and requirements of different activities across the multifunctional areas of  automotive dealerships

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • manage self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
  • establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
  • use of models of business situations and research skills;
  • identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;
  • recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
  • conduct research into business and management issues;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • apply leadership and performance management selecting the appropriate style for situations;
  • perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
  • engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
  • employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • organise data and extract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
  • listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
  • use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
  • demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
  • interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
  • manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations, and manage continued learning

4. Programme structure

4.1 Modules (total modular weight 180)

  

 

Modular Weight

BSP730

Foundations of Management

15

BSP732/BSPN03

Strategic Dealership Management

15

BSP734†/BSPN02† 

Work Based Assignment 1

15

BSP736†/BSPN05†

Work Based Assignment 2

15

BSP742†/BSPN11†

Work Based Assignment 3

15

BSP743/BSPN08

Financial Management.

15

BSP744

Project

60

BSP746/BSPN04

Retail Marketing Strategy

15

BSP747/BSPN06

Strategic Human Resource Management

15

  by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)

To complete the PG Cert in Strategic Auto Dealership Management students must complete 4 x 15 credit modules.  To complete the PG Dip in Strategic Auto Dealership Management students must complete 8 x 15 credit modules.  To complete the MSc in Strategic Auto Dealership Management students must complete 8 x 15 credit modules and a 60 credit project. 

4.2  The School of Business and Economics reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.

 

4.3 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module, see the module specification.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Management and Leadership (Professional) (Aggregate Industries) (Sept 2013, 2014 and 2015 entry)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Management and Leadership (Professional)
Programme code BSPT62
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twelve and eighteen calendar months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/programmes/departments/business-economics/management-leadership/

 

and the following: 

 

Entrance Requirements to the programme are:

i)              possession of a degree or equivalent

Or

ii)             possession of the requisite managerial experience, and normally with employment in an appropriate management position, as determined by the Programme Director.

1.5         Candidates who are members of the following approved accountancy bodies (subject to the approval of the Programme Director) may count 10 credits towards the Loughborough University Postgraduate Certificate in Management and Leadership or 20 credits towards the Loughborough University Postgraduate Diploma in Management and Leadership.

  • Association of Chartered Certified Accountants (ACCA)
  • Chartered Institute of Management Accounts (CIMA)
  • Chartered Institute of Public Finance and Accounting (CIPFA)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales (ICAEW)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland (ICAS)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants of Ireland (ICAI)

 

 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in their chosen industry sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • prepare participants for management roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
  • provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
  • enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
  • enhance the career development and employability of participants;
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with Aggregate Industries.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:

  • The impact of contextual forces on organisations including ethical, economic, environmental, social and technological change issues;
  • The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
  • The concepts, processes and institutions in the production and marketing of goods and / or services; the management of resources and operations;
  • The financing of the business enterprise:  sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
  • The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;
  • The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;
  • The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;
  • The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context to meet stakeholder interests;
  • A range of contemporary issues impacting on various areas of management;
  • The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • manage creative processes in self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
  • establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
  • use models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
  • identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;
  • recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
  • conduct research into business and management issues;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • apply leadership and performance management techniques, selecting the appropriate style for situations;
  • perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
  • engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
  • employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • scan and organise data; abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
  • listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
  • use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
  • demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
  • interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
  • manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;
  • enhance their career prospects and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisation.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Modules 

4.1.1 (total modular weight 120)

BSP901

Foundations of Management Learning & Personal Development

10

BSP902

Transformational Leadership and Change Management

20

BSP903

Information & Knowledge Management

10

BSP904

Financial Management

20

BSP906

Strategic Marketing Management

20

BSP907

Strategic & Operations Management

20

BSP963

Project Management 1

10

BSP928

Project Management 2

10

  

4.2  MSc Subjects (total modular weight 60)

BSP763

Masters Project

60

 

4.3 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also to be eligible for the award of MSc in Management & Leadership (Professional) must have achieved 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.2.

5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Healthcare Management and Governance (Sept 2013 to August 2015)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip/ PGCert
Programme title Healthcare Management and Governance
Programme code BSPT56
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty-six calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twelve and eighteen calendar months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

Entrance Requirements to the programme are: 

i)   possession of a degree or equivalent

or

ii)   possession of the academic requirements for corporate membership of

a British Chartered professional institution;

or

iii)   hold any other relevant qualification or professional experience as determined by the Programme Director together with a reasonable level of formal academic education.

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

This multi-disciplinary Postgraduate Programme in Healthcare Management and Governance is aimed at professional healthcare managers, those wishing to move from another field within healthcare and those working in specialist management areas wishing to broaden their expertise.

The programme is delivered as a series of short courses for part-time study and aims to:

  • Provide a current view of management and governance in healthcare encompassing both organisational issues and specialist areas. It particularly focuses on the integration of management processes into strategic and operational planning for the provision of a high quality health service;
  • Develop participants knowledge, increase job competencies and develop professional potential; and
  • Suit the needs of working professionals who do not have an opportunity for full-time study.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The Programme conforms to the benchmarks published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education in respect of Masters awards in business and management in 2002. Specifically the programme meets the requirements of a specialist programme for career development in that it is intended to prepare health professionals for a specialist career pathway.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

  • The framework of governance in healthcare will be taught by means of short lectures, group work and discussion with examples of systems and structures being given by the lecturers.
  • Tools and techniques used in healthcare governance will be taught by means of lectures, case studies and syndicate exercises.
  • Governance principles and practice relevant to the healthcare sector will be taught by means of case study analysis, lectures and group work.  The emphasis in this element will be upon enabling the students to develop critical thinking in respect of the application of general principles to particular situations.
  • Systems and healthcare governance will be taught by means of lecture and case study review. An overview of systems theory in healthcare will form an integral part of the teaching of this element.
  • Research methodology will be taught by means of lectures, group work and syndicate discussions. The essentially individual nature of research undertaken by students will necessitate the support of much of the formal teaching by guided study and reading and individual work within the tutorial sessions.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Identify methods for establishing an effective and integrated management and governance system. This will be taught by means of lectures and group work including the analysis of case study materials and presentation of results
  • Assess a range of risk assessment tools and select the most appropriate for use in given situations will be taught by means of short lectures and analysis of case study materials.
  • Critically analyse healthcare management and governance issues and present possible intervention strategies will be taught by means of short lectures, cases study analysis group work and syndicate exercises.
  • Evaluate the effectiveness of any interventions this will be taught by means of lectures and short presentations, case study analysis and group work. The emphasis will be upon the development of a critical facility that will enable the selection of the most appropriate criteria for intervention evaluation.
  • Guided reading and encouragement to use on-line data sources will also serve to enhance the attainment of all of these intended learning outcomes.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Produce management systems and related policies for their organization will be taught by means of lectures and guided discussions, group work and short presentations
  • Use a range of risk assessment tools and carry out risk assessments within their own organization this will be taught by means of lecture, case study analysis and other group work.
  • Devise and maintain systems for the collection, interpretation and presentation of data on untoward incidents will be taught by means of lectures and case study review. Students will be encouraged to examine and evaluate the data collection systems within their own organization. This will be reinforced and supported within the tutorial sessions
  • Develop effective risk control strategies for healthcare will be taught by means of group work and discussion, short lectures and case study evaluation. Emphasis will be placed upon the development of systems that are both robust and cost-effective.
  • Design a research tool appropriate to healthcare governance management will be taught by means of lectures, group work and guided reading. This will be supported by individual guided study facilitated by means of the tutorial sessions.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Establish management systems [will be taught by means of lectures, group work and discussion and case study analysis. Guided reading will reinforce learning]
  • Communicate with a range of stakeholders will be taught by means of case study analysis and discussion , group work (including videoed group work), role play and short lectures.
  • Motivate others to take action [will be taught by means of lectures, case study analysis, group discussions and role play]
  • Present technical and complex concepts in a form which is understandable to managers will be taught by means of case study review, group work, role play and short lectures.
  • Use information systems and communications technology, and knowledge management appropriately in acquiring analyzing and communicating information [will be taught by means of demonstrations, short lectures, group work and guided reading. Students will be encouraged further to access on-line data sources]
  • Develop research skills, including data collection, analysis and presentation [will be taught by means of lectures, group work, case study analysis and guided reading. This will be enhanced and reinforced through tutorials]

4. Programme structure

4.1       Modules

           

 

Modular Weight

BSP670

Knowledge Management and Information Systems

20

 

BSP672+

Governance in Healthcare

20

 

BSP678+

 Healthcare Environment

20

 

BSP673$

Performance and Strategic Management

20

 

BSP679$

 

 Strategic Planning and Budgeting

 20

BSP674#

Leadership and Management in Healthcare

20

 

BSP680#

 Leadership in Healthcare

20

 

BSP675

Managing Risk

20

 

BSP676

Research Methods in the Business of Healthcare

20

 

BSP677*

Masters Project

60

* by distance learning

 

4.2 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate candidates must have accumulated 60 credits.   Candidates may undertake either BSP672+ or BSP678+, plus either BSP673$ or BSP679$, plus either BSP679# or BSP674#.

5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma candidates must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 120. 

Candidates must also have accumulated at least 100 credits and achieved module marks of not less than 40% in further modules with a total module weight of 20.

5.1.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc candidates must have satisfied all of the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition must have achieved 60 credits from BSP677, the Masters Project. 

5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Management and Leadership (Public) (Sept 2013 to Aug 2015)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip/ PGCert
Programme title Management and Leadership
Programme code BSPT60
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twelve and eighteen calendar months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/managementleadership/

 

and the following: 

 

Entrance Requirements to the programme are: 

i)              possession of a degree or equivalent

Or

ii)             possession of the requisite managerial experience, and normally with employment in an appropriate management position, as determined by the Programme Director.

 

See also Exemptions under Programme Structure below.

 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in their chosen industry sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • prepare participants for management roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
  • provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
  • enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
  • enhance the career development and employability of participants;
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with business organisations.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:

  • The impact of contextual forces on organisations including ethical, economic, environmental, social and technological change issues;
  • The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
  • The concepts, processes and institutions in the production and marketing of goods and / or services; the management of resources and operations;
  • The financing of the business enterprise:  sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
  • The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;
  • The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;
  • The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;
  • The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context to meet stakeholder interests;
  • A range of contemporary issues impacting on various areas of management;
  • The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • manage creative processes in self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
  • establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
  • use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
  • identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;
  • recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
  • conduct research into business and management issues;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • apply leadership and performance management selecting the appropriate style for situations;
  • perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
  • engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
  • employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • scan and organise data; abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
  • listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
  • use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
  • demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
  • interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
  • manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;
  • enhance their career prospects and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisations.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Compulsory Subjects 

       4.1.1 Level 1 (total modular weight 50)

 

 

Module Weight

BSP805

Understanding Financial Information

10

BSP810

Planning

10

BSP815

Leadership and Influence

10

BSP820

Information Management 1

10

BSP825

Marketing

10

  

4.1.2 Level 2 (total modular weight 50)

BSP855

Financial Information for Managers

10

BSP860

Operations Management

10

BSP865

Leading Teams and Change

10

BSP870

Information Management 2

10

BSP875

Strategic Marketing Management

10

  

4.2 Optional Subjects

4.2.1 Level 1 (total modular weight 10)

BSP830

Sales and Marketing

10

BSP832

Retailing 1

10

BSP834

Total Quality 1

10

BSP836

Selling Skills

10

BSP838

Problem Solving and Decision Making

10

BSP840

Occupational Health & Safety Management

10

BSP842

Merchandising

10

BSP844

Effective Management in Small Firms 1

10

BSP846

Managing Small Business Growth 1

10

BSP847

Coaching for Impact 1

10

BSP885

Personnel Management 1

10

 

4.2.2 Level 2 (total modular weight 10)

BSP848

Coaching for Impact 2

10

BSP880

Retailing 2

10

BSP882

Total Quality 2

10

BSP884

Sales Management

10

BSP886

Forecasting and Decision Making

10

BSP888

Personnel Management 2

10

BSP892

New Product and Service Development

10

BSP894

Effective Management in Small Firms 2

10

BSP896

Managing Small Business Growth 2

10

  

4.3 MSc Subjects (total modular weight 60)

BSP763

Masters Project

60

  by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)

 

4.4 The choice of optional subjects will be made from those available.  Information on the up-to-date position is available from the School of Business and Economics.

4.5 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

 

4.6  Exemptions

With the permission of the Programme Director 60 credits may be obtained towards the award of Diploma on the basis of successful completion of all modules on the Postgraduate Certificate in Continuing Professional Development. 

Candidates with the award of Loughborough University Professional Certificate in Management may count 60 credits towards the award of Diploma.

Candidates who were awarded the Loughborough University Professional Diploma in Management prior to 2001 may count 100 credits towards the award of an MSc.

Candidates who were awarded the Loughborough University Professional Diploma in Management after 2001 may count 120 credits towards the award of an MSc.

Candidates who are members of the following approved accountancy bodies may, at the discretion of the Programme Director, count 10 credits towards the Loughborough University Postgraduate Certificate in Management and Leadership or 20 credits towards the Loughborough University Postgraduate Diploma in Management and Leadership.  Such candidates who already hold the Loughborough University Postgraduate Certificate (as outlined in 1.6 above) would only be able to count an additional 10 credits to the 60 credits they already have. 

  • Association of Chartered Certified Accountants (ACCA)
  • Chartered Institute of Management Accounts (CIMA)
  • Chartered Institute of Public Finance and Accounting (CIPFA)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales (ICAEW)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland (ICAS)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants of Ireland (ICAI)

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits.  Specifically, candidates must complete all of the level 1 modules listed in 4.1.1 (modular weight 50 credits) and one level 1 module from those listed in 4.2.1 (modular weight 10 credits).  This specific requirement may however be waived at the discretion of the Programme Director.

5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with total modular weight of 120.  Specifically, candidates must have completed all of the compulsory level 1 and level 2 modules from 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 (modular weight 100), one optional level 1 module from 4.2.1 (modular weight 10) and, one optional level 2 module from 4.2.2 (modular weight 10).   This specific requirement may however be waived at the discretion of the Programme Director.   The optional modules taken at level 2 should complement those taken at level 1.  

Candidates must also have accumulated at least 100 credits and achieved module marks of not less than 40% in further modules with a total module weight of 20.

5.1.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition must have achieved 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.3.

 

5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Wealth Management

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Wealth Management
Programme code BSPT17
Length of programme
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

First Degree and/or relevant professional qualifications and/or appropriate work experience 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in the wealth management sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • prepare participants for stakeholder roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisation;
  • provide participants with the opportunity to foster participant’s understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects relevant to their organisations role within the financial services market;
  • enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
  • develop strategic thinking and analytical capability to support a financial services business in a consumer facing / retail context;
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas: 

K1.         The impact of contextual forces on organisations including ethical, economic, environmental, social and technological change issues;

K2.         The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;

K3.         The concepts, processes and institutions in the production and marketing of goods and / or services; the management of resources and operations;

K4.         The financing of the business enterprise:  sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;

K5.         The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;

K6.         The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;

K7.         The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;

K8.         The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context to meet stakeholder interests;

K9.         A range of contemporary issues impacting on various areas of management;

K10.      The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  1. manage creative processes in self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
  2. establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
  3. identify and evaluate appropriate leadership styles for situations;
  4. evaluate complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
  5. learn through reflection on practice and experience.

 

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  1. apply leadership and performance management; selecting the appropriate style for situations;
  2. engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
  3. create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  4. make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
  5. employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
  6. conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet as well as primary research;
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  1. create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  2. scan and organise data; abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  3. use effective oral and written communication using a range of media including business reports;
  4. demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
  5. set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
  6. manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;
  7. enhance personal development and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisation.

4. Programme structure

Core Modules

Code

Module title

Modular weight

BSP970

Managing and Leading People

15

BSP973

Financial Services Environment

15

BSP974

Marketing of Financial Services

15

BSP975

Information Management

15

BSP976

Leading Successful Teams

15

BSP977

Generating Customer Loyalty

15

BSP978

Business Law and Practice

15

BSP979

Strategic Management of Business

15

BSP980

Practical Project

45

 

Optional Modules (students may select one module from) 

Code

Module title

Modular weight

BSP971

Entrepreneurship and Professional Development

15

BSP972

Financial and Performance Management

15

 

 

 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1  In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also.

5.1.1  To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates  must have accumulated at least 60 credits. Specifically, candidates must have completed BSP970, BSP971 or BSP972, BSP973 and BSP974.

5.1.2  To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates  must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 120.  Specifically, candidates must have completed the modules outlined in 5.1.1 and BSP975, BSP976, BSP977 and BSP978.

5.1.3  To be eligible for the award of MSc, candidates  must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 180.  Specifically, candidates must have completed the modules outlined in 5.1.1 and 5.1.2 and BSP979 and BSP980.

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Automotive Retail Management (2004 to August 2014 entry)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
  • Institute of the Motor Industry
  • Chartered Management Institute
Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Automotive Retail Management
Programme code BSPT32
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum and maximum periods of study for the awards covered by these regulations are specified in Regulation XXI.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See:http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/automotiveretailmanagement/

 

In addition:

- With the permission of the Programme Director 100 credits may be obtained towards the award of MSc on the basis of successful completion of the Professional Diploma in Retail Automotive Management.

- With the permission of the Programme Director 50 credits my be obtained towards the award of Diploma on the basis of successful completion of Professional Certificate in Retail Automotive Management.

- Candidates who have gained credits in modules from the Professional Certificate / Diploma in Retail Automotive are eligible to transfer these credits towards the awards of Postgraduate Certificate / Diploma MSc Automotive Retail Management.  Credits awarded under this provision will be at the discretion of the Programme Director.

- Continuing Professional Development candidates wishing to be considered for the award of Postgraduate Certificate must have undertaken only 6 modules from the list below and have fulfilled the requirements for Certificate outlined in 5. below. For the Diploma, candidates must have undertaken only 12 modules from the list below and have fulfilled the requirements outlined in 5. below. 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in the automotive retail sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • prepare participants for automotive retail management roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
  • provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
  • enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
  • enhance students’ career development in the automotive sector
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with the automotive industry.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management (MB&M)
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
  • Professional Accreditation by the Institute of the Motor Industry 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:

  • The impact of environmental forces on automotive sector organisations including ethical, economic, political, social and technological change issues;
  • The development and operation of the sector specific markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
  • The concepts and processes in the production and marketing of automotive goods and services, and the management of resources and operations;
  • The financing of the automotive dealer network involving the sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
  • The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;
  • The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on dealership operations;
  • The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;
  • The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context of the automotive sector to meet stakeholder interests;
  • The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment;
  • The roles, responsibilities and requirements of different activities across the multifunctional areas of automotive dealerships.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • manage self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
  • establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
  • use of models of business situations and research skills;
  • identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;
  • recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
  • conduct research into business and management issues;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • apply leadership and performance management selecting the appropriate style for situations;
  • perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
  • engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
  • employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • organise data and extract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
  • listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
  • use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
  • demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
  • interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
  • manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations, and manage continued learning;

4. Programme structure

4.1                  Compulsory Subjects  (total modular weight 30)

                                                                                                                                     Module Weight

           

BSPP01

Introduction to Automotive Retail Management

 

10

BSPP05/BSPN56

Managing Business Performance

 

 10

BSPP09/BSPN50 

Introduction to Business Planning

 

10

 

4.2                  Optional Subjects  

 

 BSPP13

Maximising Performance through people

 

10 

 BSPP17

 Creating a Marketing Plan

 

10 

 BSPP21/BSPN57

 Managing Quality

 

 10

 BSPP25

 Building Successful Teams

 

10 

 BSPP29/BSPN51

 Generating Customer Loyalty

 

 10

 BSPP33

 Creating a Business Plan

 

10 

 BSPP35/BSPN52

 

 Operations Management

10 

 BSPP36/BSPN65

 

 Management and leadership Skills

10 

 BSPP65

 Introduction to Employment Law

 

10 

 BSPP69

 Analysing and Budgeting for Your Business

 

 10

 BSPP73

 Introduction to Product and Consumer Law

 

10 

 BSPP85/BSPN58

 Improving Performance through Coaching

 

 10

 BSPP89/BSPN64

 Financial Skills for Non-Financial Managers

 

10 

 BSPP90/BSPN59

 Change Management

 

10 

 BSPP91/BSPN53

 Foundations of Management

10

 

 BSPP92/BSPN54

 Finance for Managers

10

 

 BSPP93/BSPN55

 Decisions Systems

10 

 

 BSPP94/BSPN63

 Human Resources Management

10 

 

 BSPP95/BSPN60

 Marketing Strategy

 10

 

 BSPP96/BSPN61

 Digital and Social Media in the Retail Car Market

10 

 

 BSPP97/BSPN62 

 Cross Cultural Market Development

10 

 

 BSP695

 Operations Management for the Accident Repair Centre

 

10 

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   

4.3                 MSc Subjects (total modular weight 60)

 

BSP732/BSPN03

Strategic Dealership Management

 

15

BSP746/BSPN04 

Retail Marketing Strategy

 

15

BSP731

Project

 

30

 

  by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)

 

4.4   For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1 To be eligible for the award of the Postgraduate Certificate in Automotive Retail Management, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits, comprising 30 credits from the compulsory modules listed in 4.1 and 30 credits from the optional modules in 4.2.

At the discretion of the Programme Director candidates for the Certificate may substitute for the modules listed in 4.2 any similar modules with an equivalent or greater weight from the School of Business and Economics suite of postgraduate modules.

5.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma in Automotive Retail Management candidates must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 120 from the modules listed in 4.1 and 4.2.

5.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc in Automotive Retail Management candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.2 and in addition must complete 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.3. 

 

Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Strategic Automotive Dealership Management (Sept 2014 and 2015 entry)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institute of the Motor Industry

Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Strategic Automotive Dealership Management
Programme code BSPT30
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty three calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Diploma and Postgraduate Certificate is twenty four calendar months and twelve calendar months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See; http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/strategicautomotivedealershipmanagement/

 

And the following:

Requirements are those referred to in Regulation XXI.  Whilst previous formal qualifications are not required, admission to the programme will normally be restricted to Dealer Principals, Senior Managers and managers aspiring to a senior role in the automotive industry. Entrants will need a minimum of 5 years managerial experience at an appropriate level.

New entrants to the automotive industry who possess a first degree (with Second Class Honours or equivalent) from a UK or recognised overseas University will also be considered.

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and develop participants management career progression in the automotive retail sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • develop participants’ automotive retail management roles in which they will be expected to further develop their contribution towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
  • provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
  • enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
  • enhance students’ career development in the automotive sector
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with the automotive industry
  • provide a global perspective on the automotive sector.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management (MB&M)
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
  • Professional Accreditation by the Institute of the Motor Industry 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

The programme is delivered through a combination of short lectures, individual and group exercises, workshops, and practical sessions.  The modules are highly participative encouraging students to contribute to class discussions and to share personal experiences and concerns with fellow students.  Students are also strongly encouraged to consider situations within their own work environments.

The Programme Director acts in the capacity of a personal tutor and provides students with advice and guidance on academic progress.  Further support/pastoral help is provided by support staff in the CAM team.  Students are required to work both individually and within groups for both study and assessment. A programme handbook is available to each student at the beginning of the programme.  The handbook sets out general advice on study, key regulations on assessment, programme regulations and module specifications for all modules available for study.  At each module, further information is provided including a module outline which details the lecture schedule and associated reading guidance.

Constructive criticism is provided to students on coursework assignments throughout the programme.

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:

K1. The impact of environmental forces on automotive sector organisations including ethical, economic, political, social and technological change issues;

K2. The development and operation of the sector specific markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;

K3. The concepts and processes in the production and marketing of automotive goods and services, and the management of resources and operations;

K4. The financing of the automotive dealer network involving the sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;

K5. The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;

K6. The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on dealership operations;

K7. The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management and the impact of these technologies on the business.

K8. The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context of the automotive sector to meet stakeholder interests;

K9. The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment;

K10. The roles, responsibilities and requirements of different activities across the multifunctional areas of  automotive dealerships;

K11. To develop an understanding of the automotive sector on a global basis.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

C1. manage self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;

C2. establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;

C3. use of models of business situations and research skills;

C4. identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;

C5. recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;

C6. conduct research into business and management issues;

C7. learn through reflection on practice and experience.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

P1. apply leadership and performance management selecting the appropriate style for situations;

P2. perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;

P3. use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;

P4. engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;

P5. create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;

P6. make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;

P7. employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;

P8. conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

T1. create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;

T2. organise data and extract meaning from information and share knowledge;

T3. use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;

T4. listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;

T5. use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;

T6. demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;

T7. set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;

T8. interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;

T9. manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations, and manage continued learning

4. Programme structure

4.1 Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 165)

  

 

Modular Weight

BSP735/BSPN01

Information and Decision Systems

15

BSP732/BSPN03

Strategic Dealership Management

15

BSP734†/BSPN02† 

Work Based Assignment 1: Information and Decision Systems

15

BSP736†/BSPN05†

Work Based Assignment 2: Strategic Dealership Management

15

BSP742†/BSPN11†

Work Based Assignment 3: Contemporary Issues

15

BSP743/BSPN08

Financial Management.

15

BSP745†/BSPN12†

Project

30

BSP746/BSPN04

Retail Marketing Strategy

15

BSP747/BSPN06

Strategic Human Resource Management

15

BSP737/BSPN07

Leading Strategic Change

15 

  by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)

 4.2 Optional Modules (total modular weight 15 credits)

 

 

Modular Weight

BSP738/BSPN09 

Managing Enterprise and Innovation

15

BSP739/BSPN10

Cross Cultural and international Management

15

 

To complete the PG Cert in Strategic Automotive Dealership Management students must complete 4 x 15 credit modules.  To complete the PG Dip in Strategic Automotive Dealership Management students must complete 8 x 15 credit modules.  To complete the MSc in Strategic Automotive Dealership Management students must complete 10 x 15 credit modules and a 30 credit project. 

 

4.3  The School of Business and Economics reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.

 

4.4 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module, see the module specification.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Security Management (DL) (Sept 2010 - 2015 entries)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Security Management
Programme code BSPT52
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty-six calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twelve and twenty-four calendar months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/securitymanagement/

 

And also the following: 

 

1.1          Entrance requirements to the programme are: 

i)                Possession of a degree or equivalent 

Or 

ii)               Have achieved the academic requirements for corporate membership of a British Chartered professional institution.

Or 

iii)              Hold any other relevant qualification or professional experience as determined by the Programme Director together with a reasonable level of formal academic education. 

Candidates who were awarded the Loughborough University Postgraduate Certificate in Security Management may count a minimum of 60 credits towards the award of Diploma. 

Candidates who were awarded the Loughborough University Postgraduate Diploma in Security Management may count a minimum of 100 credits towards the award of an MSc.

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

  • To promote knowledge and understanding in the subject of Security Management.
  • To provide advanced training where an opportunity is afforded for the security professional to bring together professional expertise and growing academic abilities.
  • To promote security management as a serious subject for academic study within the security industry.
  • To enhance the self-esteem of the participating students and to establish security management as a relevant discipline within the corporate environment in order that it might rank alongside other management disciplines.
  • To assist individuals with career development, advancement of their professional competence and standing, and their lifelong learning.
  • To provide an opportunity for security professionals from uniformed backgrounds to migrate into the corporate and private sector security domains.
  • To provide a unique academic qualification in security management, that brings together professional expertise and academic disciplines relevant to this interdisciplinary field.
  • To assist with entry into security representative bodies, for example The Security Institute, Association of Security Consultants and to assist in gaining Fellow status.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The Programme conforms to the benchmarks published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education in respect of Masters awards in business and management in 2002. Specifically the programme meets the requirements of a specialist Masters degree (Type 1 B). 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of;

Organisational behaviour, managing organisational change, and how such concepts interact with the role of the security manager.   Have a critical understanding of professional standards of behaviour and ethical conduct, together with security licensing arrangements via the Security Industry Authority framework.  Students should also understand the due legal process and the key elements associated with a crime and various criminological perspectives.  Additionally, an awareness of how the legal systems; criminal, civil and industrial tribunals impact on the work undertaken by the security professional.  Students must also understand the nuances associated with operating within both corporate and criminal domains and have an appreciation of Human Rights legislation and its’ impact upon the security industry.  The concept of pure risk, risk assessments, business continuity and contingency planning must be clearly understood.  Students must have a clear understanding of the international standards to be applied in the fields of business continuity and contingency planning.  Students will also gain knowledge of fraudulent activity, key principles of physical security (including closed circuit television) and of fraud prevention strategies.  An appreciation of the Fraud Act 2006 and the new bribery and corruption act must also be in evidence.   Data and Information Technology Security must also be understood including the relevant legal framework and countermeasures.

However the levels of knowledge and understanding are linked to the study programme undertaken, i.e. Postgraduate Certificate, Postgraduate Diploma or MSc.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to understand security management as both a practically and academically based profession that adds real value to an organisation’s effectiveness, including financial performance as opposed to being regarded as a general overhead cost. Students should also view security management not only in problem solving mode but conceptually. They should be able to conceptualise various security problems and appreciate the ramifications of various courses of action. But most important of all, the solutions on offer must be based upon credible evidence and graduates must be willing to challenge conventional wisdom.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to understand and debate the changing nature of organisations and critically analyse the nature of management and motivators within a security management context. They should also be placed in a position to understand and to apply financial appraisal systems.   Students should also appreciate the importance of professional standards and ethical frameworks and workplace diversity within a security context. In addition to this they should appreciate the evolving nature of legislation, offender behaviour and be able to construct coping/preventative strategies for dealing with nefarious activity. They should appreciate the rudiments of pure risk, be able to analyse problems and offer up practical cost effective solutions. Students should be able to apply the various crime prevention theories in a practical setting and analyse logically crime statistics. They must be capable of devising policies and procedures to deal with physical, data protection and information technology security issues, these to include risk assessment, business continuity and contingency planning.

Student should gain an appreciation of computer related crime and the application of various security countermeasures. All students should be able to conduct and evaluate primary and secondary research in the field of security.  Students are aware of the various security related international standards and their location and interpretation when policy documents have to be written.

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to write a good quality academic essay in both a logical and coherent fashion in a variety of security related settings by making use of a variety of information sources. This skill set should prove invaluable when the security manager is detailing a business case to acquire additional resources.

The student will also be capable of critical analysis of source material and have the ability to work to a pre-set timescale, and independently of others, in an organised fashion.  An ability to manage time efficiently, must also be demonstrated.

 

 

4. Programme structure

4.1 Modules 

 

 4.1 Compulsory Modules (total module weight of 60)

   

Module Weight

BSP563*

Physical Security and Fraud and Information Security

20

BSP564*

The Management of Computer Related Crime

20

BSP565*

Security Risk Management

20

 

4.2 Optional Modules (total module weight of 60)

   

Module Weight

BSP996* Crime Investigation Management Skills 

20

BSP561*

Business Management Skills

20

BSP562*

Law and Criminology

20

BSP566*

Research Methodology

20

 

4.3 MSc Subjects (total modular weight of 60)

BSP558*

Masters Project

60

*  by Distance Learning 

 

4.4 The choice of optional subjects will be made from those available.  Information on the up-to-date position is available from the School of Business and Economics. 

4.5 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

 

4.6 Exemptions

If applicants possess certain prior qualifications they may be considered for exemption from some modules. 

.1         Consideration for exemption from BSP562 will be given if candidates have a first degree in law from a UK University. 

.2         Applicants possessing a recognised Postgraduate Diploma in Security Management, from another UK University, may be considered for the Masters with exemption from certain modules, providing the final award totals 180 credits. 

.3         Exemption from the compulsory module BSP558 will not be granted. 

.4         Any exemptions to be offered must be at the final discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching).

 

 

 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1   In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits.  Specifically, candidates must complete and achieve credit in BSP563, BSP564 and BSP565.

5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of MSc, candidates must have satisfied all the requirements for the Postgraduate Diploma  and in addition must have accumulated 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.3.

 5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MRes International Crisis Management (to August 2015)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MRes International Crisis Management/PGDip Advanced Studies in International Crisis Management/ PGCer
Programme title International Crisis Management
Programme code BSPT91 (full-time)/BSPT93 (part-time)
Length of programme The programme is available on a full-time and part-time basis. The duration of the programme is 12 months full time/24 months part-time.
UCAS code n/a
Admissions criteria

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/politics/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

  • To provide specialised, systematic and in-depth knowledge of international crisis management deploying appropriate theories, concepts and methods associated with the specific subject area. 
  • To enable students to acquire a critical awareness of the breadth of current issues involved in the study of international crisis management.
  • To provide training in the concepts and applications of research methods and research design appropriate for the study of international crisis management. 
  • To offer opportunities for independent study and research within the field of international crisis management. 
  • To equip students with the skills to pursue careers as trained international relations researchers, and with particular reference to international crisis management. 

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • Framework for Higher Education Qualifications/Descriptors for a Higher Education qualification at Level 7. 
  • The Framework for higher education qualifications in England, Wales and Northern Ireland (pp. 20-23). 
  • QAA Master’s degree characteristics 2010. 
  • Criteria for the Degree of Master of Research (MRes). 
  • Loughborough University Learning and Teaching Strategy. 
  • Annual and Periodic Programme Reviews. 
  • Specialisms and research interests of the teaching staff.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of: 

  • K1: The theoretical and analytical perspectives within the field of international crisis management, deployed in literatures at the forefront of current research. 
  • K2: The complex linkages between these perspectives and their application to the realities and practical case studies of international crisis management. 
  • K3: The history of international crisis management and contemporary case studies. 
  • K4: Research design and methodology appropriate to the study of international crisis management at an advanced level, including the successful completion of independently researched project.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • C1: Identify and critically evaluate theories and conceptual approaches appropriate to the study of international crisis management at an advanced level. 
  • C2: Identify and critically apply theories and concepts to case studies of international crisis management, developing existing knowledge and understanding. 
  • C3: Identify case studies for analysis in international crisis management. 
  • C4: Demonstrate sophisticated skills of research design and research methodology relevant to the study of international crisis management.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • P1: Formulate research questions and research strategies for studying international crisis management. 
  • P2: Develop research frameworks for the completion of an independent research project/dissertation pertaining to the study of international crisis management. 
  • P3: Demonstrate timely management of a research project on international crisis management that is consistent with both professional practice and the principles of research ethics in the field of International Relations. 
  • P4: Manage research, source materials, data and referencing, and research findings relating to the study of international crisis management, including translation into policy orientated products and services (where appropriate).
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • T1: Design and complete a research project, manage data and demonstrate independent learning ability and self-learning skills (using the Library and other printed, audio-visual and electronic resources; time management). 
  • T2: Demonstrate decision making abilities in complex situations and exercise of initiative and leadership. 
  • T3: Demonstrate sophisticated written and oral communication and ICT skills. 
  • T4: Discuss networking, team working and human resource management issues. 

4. Programme structure

Full time students take modules with a combined weight of 60 cr in semester 1 and 60 cr in semester 2. In addition, students complete a 60 cr. dissertation between May and September.

Code

Module title

Modular weight

Semester (where appropriate)

Compulsory – c /Optional - o

EUP319

Philosophical Foundations of Social Science Research

30

1

c

BSP499

The Politics and Practice of International Crisis Management

30

1

c

EUP320

Research Design

30

2

c

BSP498

Comparative Foreign Policy: Issues and Cases

30

2

c

BSP496

Dissertation

60

3

c

EUP405

Dissertation P/T 

60

3

c

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XXI for candidates who have the right of re-examination to be reassessed in the University’s Special Assessment Period where modules allow.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

n/a

Programme Specification

BS MSc Occupational Health and Safety Management (Oct 2015 entry)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

See:  http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/programmes/departments/business-economics/occupational-health-safety-management/

Holders of the Diploma or MSc satisfy the academic requirements for graduate membership of the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health

Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Occupational Health and Safety Management
Programme code BSPT50
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twenty-eight calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is seven and fourteen months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/occupationalhealthandsafetymanagement/

 

and  also the following:

Entrance requirements to the programme:

i)                Possession of a degree or equivalent 

Or 

ii)               Have achieved the academic requirements for corporate membership of a British Chartered professional institution.

Or 

iii)              Hold any other relevant qualification or professional experience as determined by the Programme Director together with a reasonable level of formal academic education.

 

Exemptions 

Students holding the diploma in Occupational Safety and Health as awarded by: 

i)          The National Examination Board in Occupational Safety and Health (National or International Diploma) and accredited by the QCA and the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health; or

ii)         The British Safety Council Level 6 Diploma, and accredited by the QCA and the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health; or

iii)        another Higher Education Institute accredited by the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health 

may be admitted to the Programme and given exemption from modules BSP540–BSP544 inclusive, and given 75 credits transfer for their existing award.

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The multi-disciplinary Postgraduate Programme in Occupational Health and Safety Management is aimed at professional health and safety advisors and managerial, engineering and scientific staff who have a significant responsibility for occupational health and safety.

The programme uses a combination of short courses and distance learning modules for part-time study.

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management progression in occupational safety and health in their chosen industry sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual, research and analytical abilities;
  • enhance the career development and employability of participants;
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating;
  • the academic basis for chartered membership of the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The Programme conforms to the benchmarks published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education in respect of Masters awards in business and management . Specifically the programme meets the requirements of a specialist Masters degree (Type 1) for a career development.

The following additional reference points also provide a benchmark for programme development, delivery and content: 

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of

K1  the structure and application of occupational health and safety law in the United Kingdom;

K2  advanced risk assessment techniques;

K3  the features and application of an occupational health and safety management system;

K4  the significant physical hazards in workplaces and their respective controls;

K5  the significant occupational health hazards in workplaces and their respective controls;

K6  the relevance and application of human factors to occupational health and safety management;

 

Specific to the MSc:

K7  the uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

C1  identify and critically apply the legal framework to a complex range of occupational health and safety situations;

C2  establish criteria in respect of the tolerability of individual and organisational risk;

C3  assess a broad range of health and safety risks using complex tools;

C4  critically evaluate the effectiveness of any occupational health and safety intervention;

C5  learn through reflection on practice and experience.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

P1  influence the development of occupational health and safety policy;

P2  engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;

P3  create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;

P4  make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a health and safety context;

P5  employ qualitative and quantitative skills;

P6  conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of occupational health and safety- related materials including journals, legislation, approved codes of practice and recognised guidance.

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

T1  create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;

T2  scan and organise data and communicate knowledge;

T3  use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;

T4  listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;

T5  use effective oral and written communication using a range of media including written reports;

T6  interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;

T7  manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;

T8  enhance their career prospects and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisation.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Modules 

 

 

Module Weight

BSPR10

Occupational Health and Safety and the Law

15

BSPR11

Risk Management

15

BSPR12*

Management of Physical Hazards

15

BSPR13*

Occupational Health Management

15

BSPR14          

Safety and the Management of People

15

BSPR15

Occupational Health and Safety Management Evidence Based Practical Project

45

BSPR16

Occupational Health and Safety Management Evidence Based Practical Project

45

BSPA01

/BSP547†

Masters Research Project

60

 * by distance learning

partially by distance learning (>50%)

To complete the PG Cert in Occupational Health and Safety Management students must complete 4 x 15 credit modules. To complete the PG Dip in Occupational Health and Safety Management students must complete 5 x 15 credit modules and a 45 credit practical project. Section 5 outlines the specific modules required for each degree award.

To complete the MSc students must complete 5 x 15 credit modules, a 45 credit practical project and a 60 credit research project.

 

4.2 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

 

 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits.  Specifically, candidates must complete modules, BSPR10, BSPR11 and two others chosen from BSPR12, BSPR13 or BSPR14.                                                 

5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with total modular weight of 120 credits.  Specifically, candidates must complete modules BSPR10-15 inclusive.

5.1.3 Apart from circumstances detailed in 5.1.4, to be eligible for the award of MSc, candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition, must have accumulated 60 credits from module BSPA01/BSP547.

5.1.4 Holders of recognized diplomas as detailed in Exemptions (see Admissions Criteria section above) to be eligible for the award of MSc, must have accumulated 105 credits. Specifically, candidates must complete modules BSPR16 and BSPA01/BSP547.

 

 

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Leadership and Management (Public) (2015 entry)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip/ PGCert (available as entry as well as exit awards)
Programme title Leadership and Management
Programme code BSPT60
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twelve and eighteen calendar months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

 

Entrance Requirements to the programme are: 

i)              Possession of a degree or equivalent

Or

ii)             Have achieved the academic requirements for corporate membership of a British Chartered professional institution;

Or

iii)            Hold any other relevant qualification or professional experience as determined by the Programme Director together with a reasonable level of formal education

 

See also Exemptions under Programme Structure below.

 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in their chosen industry sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • prepare participants for management roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
  • enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with business organisations.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications/Descriptors for a Higher Education qualification at Level 7
  • School of Business and Economics Business Plan
  • Loughborough University Learning and Teaching Strategy
  • The University academic quality procedures

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:

     K1. The impact of contextual forces on organisations including ethical, economic, environmental, social and technological change                  issues;

     K2. The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market                            orientation and the marketing mix that support organisational strategy;

     K3. Operations management of products and services to support effective and efficient resource use and process design;

     K4. The financing of the business enterprise:  sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and                    financial reporting applications;

     K5. The characteristics of the leadership and management roles; the leadership, management and development of people within                  organisations; organisational behavior and culture, human resource management and leading change; managing well-being in              organisations; evidence-based leadership and management;

Specific to PGDip/MSc:-

     K6. The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

3.2 Skills  and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

    C1. manage creative processes in self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal; recognise the           need for systematic thinking and cross-functional approaches

    C2. establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, evaluating               and solving business problems;

    C3. conduct critical analyses of management research and practice; source, analyse and evaluate business-related data from a wide             variety of organizational, professional and research sources;

    C4. identify appropriate leadership styles for situations.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

    P1. use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports; produce written communication           that argues the business case, supported by valid and reliable evidence;

    P2. create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;

    P3. make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;

    P4. employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills to aid               decision-making;

Specific to PGDip/MSc:-

    P5. model reflexive practice such that they can teach others the benefits of goal-setting, reflection and analysis for the development             of self and the business; adapt their management and leadership approach to meet the context and environment in which they             operate;

    P6. perform effectively as a team leader and team member, recognising and applying each individual’s contributions, including team             selection, team development, delegation, and management;

    P7. engage in oral communication that achieves objectives, including listening, negotiating, persuading and influencing.

 

c. Key transferable skills:

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

    T1. create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions and deliver critically evaluative reports;

    T2. scan and organise data; abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;

    T3. use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;

    T4. listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;

    T5. use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Core Modules 

 Code

 Module Title

Modular Weight

BSPH01

Financial Management

15

BSPH02

Managing and Leading People

15

BSPH03

Operations Management

15

BSPH04

Marketing Management

15

BSPH11

Information Management and Governance

15

BSPH15

Leadership and Change

15

BSPA01† Masters Research Project 60

  

4.2 Optional Modules

BSPH10

Strategic Management

15

BSPH12

Project Management

15

BSPH13

Managing Individual and Team Performance

15

BSPH14

Management of Learning and Development

15

BSPH16

Selection and Assessment

15

BSPH17

Manager as a Coach

15

BSPH18

Coaching and Mentoring

15

BSPH19

Management of the Consultancy Process

15

BSPH20

New Product and Service Development

15

BSPH21

Occupational Health and Safety Management

15

BSPH40

Leadership Framing and Problem Solving

15

BSPH41

Value Focused Decision Making

15

BSPH42

Hidden Traps in Decision Making

15

BSPH43

Learning from Decisions Using Systems Thinking

15

BSPH30

Service Marketing

15

BSPH32

Service Operations

15

BSPH33

Service Strategy

15

BSPH34

Public Management

15

BSPH50

Innovation Management

15

BSPH51

Entrepreneurship

15

BSPH52

Strategy and Planning

15

BSPH53

Intellectual Property

15

BSPH54

Understanding Business Failure

15

BSPR02

Risk Management

15

  by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)

 

To complete the PG Cert in Leadership and Management students must complete 4 x 15 credit modules.  To complete the PG Dip in Leadership and Management students must complete 8 x 15 credit modules.  To complete the MSc in Leadership and Management students must complete 8 x 15 credit modules and a 60 credit research project.  Section 5 outlines the specific modules required for each degree award.

4.3 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

 

4.4  Exemptions

Candidates who are members of the following approved accountancy bodies may, at the discretion of the Programme Director, count 15 credits towards the Loughborough University Postgraduate Diploma in Leadership and Management and the MSc in Leadership and Management. 

  • Association of Chartered Certified Accountants (ACCA)
  • Chartered Institute of Management Accounts (CIMA)
  • Chartered Institute of Public Finance and Accounting (CIPFA)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales (ICAEW)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland (ICAS)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants of Ireland (ICAI)

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.1 specifically, BSPH01; BSPH02; BSPH03 and BSPH04.

5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with total modular weight of 120.  Specifically, candidates must have completed all of the compulsory modules from 4.1 (modular weight 90, not including BSPA01) and two optional modules from 4.2 (modular weight 30).

5.1.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition must have achieved 60 credits module BSPA01.

 

5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

n/a

Programme Specification

BS MSc Healthcare Management and Governance (Oct 2015 entry)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

n/a

Final award MSc/ PGDip/ PGCert
Programme title Healthcare Management and Governance
Programme code BSPT56
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twelve and eighteen calendar months respectively.
UCAS code n/a
Admissions criteria

see: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/programmes/departments/business-economics/healthcare-management-governance/

Entrance Requirements to the programme are: 

i)   possession of a degree or equivalent

or

ii)   possession of the academic requirements for corporate membership of

a British Chartered professional institution;

or

iii)   hold any other relevant qualification or professional experience as determined by the Programme Director together with a reasonable level of formal academic education.

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • provide a current view of management and governance in healthcare encompassing both organisational issues and specialist areas.
  • develop skills in the integration of management processes into strategic and operational planning for the provision of a high quality health service;
  • develop participants knowledge, increase job competencies and develop professional potential.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • Framework for Higher Education Qualifications/Descriptors for a Higher Education qualification at Level 7.
  • The benchmark statement for Masters awards in business and management
  • School of Business and Economics Business Plan
  • Loughborough University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
  • The University academic quality procedures

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

K1  The framework of governance principles and practice relevant to the healthcare sector;

K2  The tools and techniques used in healthcare governance and their application to strategic and operational planning;

K3  The principles of risk management, risk perception and risk communication;

K4  The concept, assessment and evaluation of contemporary resilience thoughts and ideas; the importance of emergency preparedness, resilience and response in the context of Health and Social Care;

K5 The role of knowledge management and information technology in the provision of patient focused healthcare;

K6  The knowledge and skills for the effective use of accounting and financial information;

K7 The principles of leadership and people management, organizational culture and crisis settings.

 

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

C1  analyse and identify methods for establishing an effective and integrated management and governance system;

C2  select the most appropriate risk assessment tools;

C3  develop critical thinking to the application of general principles in particular situations;

C4  select the most appropriate criteria for intervention evaluation;

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

P1  establish and implement a governance operating system that provides assurances to healthcare boards;

P2  select the most appropriate risk assessment tools and carry out risk assessments within their own organization; select the most appropriate criteria for intervention evaluation;

 P3  examine and evaluate the data collection systems within their own organization;

 

 

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

T1  create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions and deliver critically evaluative reports;

T2  scan and organise data; abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;

T3  listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;

T4  use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;

T5  use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;

T6  carry out small scale research projects using data collection, analysis and presentation methods. 

4. Programme structure

4.1       Core Modules

           

 

Modular Weight

BSPR01

What is Resilience

15

BSPR02

Risk Management

15

BSPR23

Leadership and Management

15

BSPH01

Financial Management

15

BSPR20

Performance and Strategic Management

15

BSPR21

Governance in Healthcare

15

BSPR22

Knowledge Management and Information Systems

15

 

BSPR31

Health and Societal Resilience in Context

15

 

BSPA01*

Masters Research Project

60

* partially by distance learning (>50%)

To complete the PG Cert in Healthcare Management and Governance students must complete 4 x 15 credit modules.  To complete the PG Dip in Healthcare Management and Governance students must complete 8 x 15 credit modules.  To complete the MSc in Healthcare Management and Governance students must complete 8 x 15 credit modules and a 60 credit research project.  Section 5 outlines the specific modules required for each degree award.

 

4.2 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits from the modules listed in Section 4 specifically, BSPR01; BSPR02; BSPR23 and BSPH01.

5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with total modular weight of 120.  Specifically, candidates must have completed all of the compulsory modules from Section 4 (not including BSPA01).

5.1.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition must have achieved 60 credits module BSPA01.

 

5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re- assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Leadership and Service Management (2015 entry)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip (available as entry awards) MSc/ PGDip/ PGCert (available as exit awards)
Programme title Leadership and Service Management
Programme code BSPT88
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Diploma is eighteen calendar months.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

 

Entrance Requirements to the programme are: 

i)              Possession of a degree or equivalent

Or

ii)             Have achieved the academic requirements for corporate membership of a British Chartered professional institution;

Or

iii)            Hold any other relevant qualification or professional experience as determined by the Programme Director together with a reasonable level of formal academic education

 

See also Exemptions under Programme Structure below.

 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

In the current economy where services contribute to 70% of the UK economy relative to manufacturing there is a real need to equip managers with the ability to support services in a dynamic context. The MSc in Leadership and Service Management aims to engage students in applied research and scholarship to support the design, engagement and transformation of service organisations.  The MSc in Leadership and Service Management will concentrate on the links between the major business functions and their role in the service sector. The programme will address business and management issues from the service sector in general (rather than from one sub-sector) with an emphasis on different service sub-sectors learning from each other.

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in the service sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • develop the people management skills of participants to enable them to deal effectively with a range of managerial issues related to individuals and teams;
  • provide insights into the field of business management for private, public, and third sector services operating in the dynamic context of support services;
  • enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
  • develop and manage customer-facing service skills and the engagement and transformation of service organisation.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications/Descriptors for a Higher Education qualification at Level 7
  • School of Business and Economics Business Plan
  • Loughborough University Learning and Teaching Strategy
  • The University academic quality procedures

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:

K1. The impact of contextual forces on organisations including ethical, economic, environmental, social and technological change issues in particular ensuring that the voice of the customer is at the core of decision making within the service sector;

K2. The development and operation of markets for resources and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix that support organisational strategy;

K3. Operations management to support effective and efficient service delivery and design of processes for fulfilling customer requirements;

K4. The financing of the business enterprise:  sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;

K5. The characteristics of the leadership and management roles; the leadership, management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour and culture, human resource management and leading change; managing well-being in organisations; evidence-based leadership and management;

K6. The use of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context to meet stakeholder interests, in particular organising for the predictable and responding to the unpredictable;

K7. An understanding of contemporary issues such as emerging media technologies impacting on various areas of management and service fulfilment;

K8. The academic theories of leadership and service management and their role in the transformation of service organisations.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

3.2 Skills  and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

C1. manage creative processes in self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal; recognise the need for systematic thinking and cross-functional approaches;

C2. establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, evaluating and solving business problems;

C3. conduct critical analyses of management research and practice; source, analyse and evaluate business-related data from a wide variety of organizational, professional and research sources;

C4. identify appropriate leadership styles for situations and understanding customer working styles;

C5. recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values, integrate consideration of ethical and organizational values in their decisions and actions.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

P1. model reflexive practice such that they can teach others the benefits of goal-setting, reflection and analysis for the development of self and the business; adapt their management and leadership approach to meet the context and environment in which they operate;

P2. perform effectively as a team leader and team member, recognising and applying each individual’s contributions, including team selection, team development, delegation, and management;

P3. use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports; produce written communication that argues the business case, supported by valid and reliable evidence;

P4. engage in oral communication that achieves objectives, including listening, negotiating, persuading and influencing;

P5. create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;

P6. make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;

P7. employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills to aid decision-making.

 

 

c. Key transferable skills:

c. Generic skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

T1. create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions and deliver critically evaluative reports;

T2. scan and organise data; abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;

T3. use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;

T4. listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;

T5. use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Core Modules 

 Code

 Module Title

Modular Weight

BSPH01

Financial Management

15

BSPH02

Managing and Leading People

15

BSPH03

Operations Management

15

BSPH04

Marketing Management

15

BSPH30 Service Marketing 15
BSPH32 Service Operations 15
BSPH33 Service Strategy 15
BSPA01† Masters Research Project 60

4.2 Optional Modules

BSPH15 Leadership and Change 15
BSPH34 Public Management 15

 

  by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)

To complete the PG Dip in Leadership and Service Management students must complete 8 x 15 credit modules including all Core modules in 4.1 (with the exception of BSPA01) and one Optional module from 4.2.  To complete the MSc in Leadership and Service Management students must complete 8 x 15 credit modules and a 60 credit research project. 

4.3 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

 

4.4  Exemptions

Candidates who are members of the following approved accountancy bodies may, at the discretion of the Programme Director, count 15 credits towards the Loughborough University Postgraduate Diploma in Leadership and Service Management and the MSc in Leadership and Service Management. 

  • Association of Chartered Certified Accountants (ACCA)
  • Chartered Institute of Management Accounts (CIMA)
  • Chartered Institute of Public Finance and Accounting (CIPFA)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales (ICAEW)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland (ICAS)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants of Ireland (ICAI)

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with total modular weight of 120.  Specifically, candidates must have completed all of the Core modules from 4.1 (modular weight 105, not including BSPA01) plus one Optional module listed in 4.2 (modular weight 15).

5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of MSc candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.1.1 and in addition must have achieved 60 credits from module BSPA01.

 

5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

n/a

Programme Specification

BS MSc Leadership and Innovation Management (2015 entry)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip (available as entry awards) MSc/ PGDip/ PGCert (available as exit awards)
Programme title Leadership and Innovation Management
Programme code BSPT89
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Diploma is eighteen calendar months.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

 

Entrance Requirements to the programme are: 

i)              Possession of a degree or equivalent

Or

ii)             Have achieved the academic requirements for corporate membership of a British Chartered professional institution;

Or

iii)            Hold any other relevant qualification or professional experience as determined by the Programme Director together with a reasonable level of formal academic education

 

 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The need for innovation and its importance for survival and growth are now recognised by many types of organisation.  Coupled with entrepreneurial behaviour, the effective management of the innovation process is essential to the successful implementation of new and improved business products, services and processes. 

The programme aims to:

  • develop an understanding of the importance of an entrepreneurial attitude in individuals and organisations, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • develop students critical thinking in order to evaluate innovation as a process through the use of contemporary research methods;
  • investigate the barriers to innovation and encourage students to analyse obstacles which prevent the successful implementation of new ideas;
  • enable participants to study entrepreneurial behaviour both as an essential part of new business start-up and as a competency required by employers in the modern business environment.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications/Descriptors for a Higher Education qualification at Level 7
  • School of Business and Economics Business Plan
  • Loughborough University Learning and Teaching Strategy
  • The University academic quality procedures

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:

K1. The impact of contextual forces on organisations including ethical, economic, environmental, social and technological change issues;

K2. The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix that support organisational strategy;

K3. Operations management of products and services to support effective and efficient resource use and process design;

K4. The financing of the business enterprise:  sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;

K5. The characteristics of the leadership and management roles; the leadership, management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour and culture, human resource management and leading change; managing well-being in organisations; evidence-based leadership and management;

K6. The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;

K7. The complexity of the innovation process and its importance in the current economic climate;

K8. The academic theories of entrepreneurship and the interconnectedness between entrepreneurial tendencies and resulting behaviour.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

3.2 Skills  and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

C1. manage creative processes in self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal; recognise the need for systematic thinking and cross-functional approaches;

C2. establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems as part of innovation management;

C3. conduct critical analyses of management research and practice; source, analyse and evaluate business-related data from a wide variety of organizational, professional and research sources;

C4. identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;

C5. recognise the components of entrepreneurial behaviour and the value of taking decisive action to influence organisational success.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

P1. use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports; produce written communication that argues the business case, supported by valid and reliable evidence;

P2. create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;

P3. make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;

P4. employ numerical and quantitative skills including demonstrating the rational use of business and risk analysis tools to analyse company performance;

P5. engage in oral communication that achieves objectives, including listening, negotiating, persuading and influencing stakeholders;

P6. model reflexive practice such that they can teach others the benefits of goal-setting, reflection and analysis for the development of self and the business; adapt their management and leadership approach to meet the context and environment in which they operate;

P7. perform effectively as a team leader and team member, recognising and applying each individual’s contributions, including team selection, team development, delegation, and management,

 

 

c. Key transferable skills:

c. Generic skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

T1. create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;

T2. scan and organise data; abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;

T3. use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;

T4. listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;

T5. use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports to communicate effectively with specialist and non-specialist audiences.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Modules 

 Code

 Module Title

Modular Weight

BSPH01

Financial Management

15

BSPH02

Managing and Leading People

15

BSPH03

Operations Management

15

BSPH04

Marketing Management

15

BSPH15

Leadership and Change

15

BSPH50 Innovation Management 15
BSPH51 Entrepreneurship 15
BSPH52 Strategy and Planning 15
BSPA01† Masters Research Project 60

  by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)

 

To complete the PG Dip in Leadership and Innovation Management students must complete 8 x 15 credit modules.  To complete the MSc in Leadership and Innovation Management students must complete 8 x 15 credit modules and a 60 credit research project. 

4.2 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

 

4.3  Exemptions

Candidates who are members of the following approved accountancy bodies may, at the discretion of the Programme Director, count 15 credits towards the Loughborough University Postgraduate Diploma in Leadership and Innovation Management and the MSc in Leadership and Innovation Management. 

  • Association of Chartered Certified Accountants (ACCA)
  • Chartered Institute of Management Accounts (CIMA)
  • Chartered Institute of Public Finance and Accounting (CIPFA)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales (ICAEW)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland (ICAS)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants of Ireland (ICAI)

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with total modular weight of 120.  Specifically, candidates must have completed all of the compulsory modules from 4.1 (modular weight 120, not including BSPA01).

5.1.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.1.1 and in addition must have achieved 60 credits from module BSPA01.

 

5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

n/a

Programme Specification

BS MSc Healthcare and Societal Resilience (Oct 2015 entry)

Academic Year: 2015/16

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

n/a

Final award MSc/ PGDip/ PGCert (available as entry as well as exit awards)
Programme title Healthcare and Societal Resilience
Programme code BSPT99
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twelve and eighteen calendar months respectively.
UCAS code n/a
Admissions criteria

Entrance Requirements to the programme are: 

i)   possession of a degree or equivalent

or

ii)   have achieved the academic requirements for corporate membership of

a British Chartered professional institution;

or

iii)   hold any other relevant qualification or professional experience as determined by the Programme Director together with a reasonable level of formal academic education.

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

This multi-disciplinary Postgraduate Programme in Healthcare and Societal resilience is aimed at professional healthcare practitioners, those wishing to move from another field within or outside of healthcare and those working in specialist management areas wishing to broaden their expertise.  The programme’s specific aims are:

 

  • To promote knowledge and understanding in the subject of Healthcare and Societal Resilience, incorporating emergency preparedness, resilience and response as it specifically pertains to the field of Healthcare; encompassing, both organisational issues and specialist areas. 

 

  • To promote the integration of emergency preparedness resilience and response strategies into strategic and operational planning for the provision of high quality health services

 

  • To provide advanced training where an opportunity is afforded for healthcare and resilience professionals to bring together professional expertise and growing academic abilities

 

  • To promote Healthcare and Societal Resilience as serious subjects for academic study within the field of organisational resilience

 

  • To enhance the self-esteem of the participating students and to establish healthcare and societal resilience as relevant (and connected) disciplines within the corporate environment in order that it might rank alongside other management disciplines

 

  • To assist individuals with career development, advancement of their professional competence and standing, and their lifelong learning.

 

  • To provide an opportunity for healthcare professionals from uniformed and public sector backgrounds to migrate into the corporate and private sector healthcare and resilience domains.

 

  • To provide a unique academic qualification in Healthcare and Societal Resilience, that brings together professional expertise and academic disciplines relevant to this interdisciplinary field.

 

  • To assist with entry into academic and civil protection representative bodies, for example The Institute of Civil Protection and Emergency Management and the Emergency Planning Society and to assist in gaining Fellow status. To similarly assist with entry into professional networks with a view to expanding the employability and commercial traction of the candidate in their post-graduation professional life. 

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • Framework for Higher Education Qualifications/Descriptors for a Higher Education qualification at Level 7.
  • The benchmark statement for Masters awards in business and management
  • School of Business and Economics Business Plan
  • Loughborough University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
  • The University academic quality procedures

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

K1  The theoretical and analytical perspectives within the study of healthcare and societal resilience particularly those of emergency preparedness, resilience and response, as deployed at the forefront of current research;

K2  The professional standards of behaviour and ethical conduct, required in the application of Healthcare and Societal resilience strategies in society today;

K3  The applicable statutory obligations and due legal process associated with emergency preparedness, resilience and response and associated healthcare perspectives;

K4 The ways in which risk is assessed, managed and communicated within crisis and emergency preparedness, resilience and response situations in the Healthcare setting;

K5  How the relevant guidance issued by statutory and advisory bodies in relation to emergency planning, civil contingencies and resilience can impact upon healthcare resilience strategies and similarly how theories and insights from case studies and past incidents help to inform this work;

K6  How their work fits into domestic and international healthcare and societal resilience contexts, and so gain a better understanding of the political and social impacts of healthcare resilience initiatives over a target population or society. 

Specific to the MSc:

 K7 How to research design and apply methodologies appropriate to the study of healthcare and societal resilience, towards the successful completion of independently researched projects.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

C1  Identify and critically evaluate theories and conceptual approaches appropriate to the study of healthcare and societal resilience and its associated emergency preparedness, resilience and response processes;

C2  View healthcare and societal resilience challenges not only in problem solving mode but conceptually and be able to identify methods for establishing effective emergency preparedness and resilience systems;

 C3 Conceptualise various healthcare and societal resilience risks and problems, appreciate the various consequences, costs and positive externalities of various courses of action;

 C4 All the solutions on offer from students must be based upon credible evidence and strong conceptual understandings and graduates must be willing to challenge conventional wisdom;

 C5 Demonstrate skills of research design and research methodology relevant to the study of healthcare and societal resilience.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

 P1  Understand and debate the changing nature of HealthCare and societal resilience strategies as it is applied to populations and societies as well as critically analysing the nature of management and motivators within healthcare resilience context.

 P2 Appreciate the importance of professional standards and ethical frameworks and workplace diversity within a security and risk management context.

 P3 Appreciate the evolving nature of legislation, hazard and threat behaviours and be able to construct coping/preventative strategies for dealing with nefarious activity.

 P4 Apply the various resilience theories in a practical setting. They must be capable of devising policies and procedures to deal with threats to organizational resilience, including terrorism, physical, data protection and information technology security issues, these to include risk assessment, business continuity and contingency planning.

 P5 Formulate research questions and research strategies for resilience in a Healthcare setting.

 P6 Develop research frameworks for the completion of an independent research project/dissertation pertaining to the study of healthcare and societal resilience.

 P7 Manage research, source materials, data and referencing, and research findings relating to the study of healthcare and societal resilience, including translation into policy orientated products and services (where appropriate).

P8 Demonstrate timely management of a research project on healthcare and societal resilience that is consistent with both professional practice and the principles of research ethics.

 

 

 

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

T1  Write a good quality academic report in both a logical and coherent fashion in a variety of healthcare and societal resilience settings by making use of a variety of information sources.

T2  Critically analysis of source material and have the ability to work to a pre-set timescale, and independently of others, in an organised fashion.

T3  Present complex ideas orally, and to work within groups to produce and disseminate an appropriate deliverable.

T4  Design and complete a research project, manage data and demonstrate independent learning ability and self-learning skills (using the Library and other printed, audio-visual and electronic resources; time management).

T5  Demonstrate decision making abilities in complex situations and exercise of initiative and leadership.

T6  Demonstrate sophisticated written and oral communication and ICT skills.

T7  Discuss networking, team working and human resource management issues 

4. Programme structure

4.1       Core Modules

           

 

Modular Weight

BSPR01

What is Resilience

15

BSPR02

Risk Management

15

BSPR03

Emergency Simulations

15

BSPR23

Leadership and Management

15

BSPR30

Population and Community Emergency

15 

BSPR31

Health and Societal Resilience in Context

15 

BSPR32

Communicating Risk Hazard and Threat Information

15